JP6915657B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include operating members that operate on motors and the like. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of operating members.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-012194

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a possibility that Rukoto operates the operation member in good suited difficult.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable Rukoto suitably by operating the operation member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is composed of at least a first light emitting means capable of emitting light and a second light emitting means capable of emitting light and different from the first light emitting means. A light-emitting means, a brightness-variable means that can at least change the brightness of the first light-emitting means to a first brightness and a second brightness that is darker than the first brightness, and a plurality of movable operating members. The operation control means for controlling the plurality of operation members to perform the on operation, which is a predetermined operation, based on the power on, is provided, and the brightness variable means performs the on operation by the operation control means. if it is controlled to perform the der those for varying the brightness in the second luminance of the first light-emitting means is, prior SL-on during execution of the operation, luminance is the second of the second light emitting means The configuration is such that the predetermined brightness is at least brighter than the brightness of.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 can be played using a predetermined gaming medium in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a light emitting means composed of at least a first light emitting means capable of emitting light and a second light emitting means capable of emitting light and different from the first light emitting means, and at least the first light emitting means . The brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed to at least a first brightness and a second brightness darker than the first brightness, a plurality of movable operating members, and the power-on. When a plurality of operating members are provided with an operation control means for controlling to perform a closing operation which is a predetermined operation, and the luminance variable means is controlled by the operation controlling means to perform the closing operation. in the der those for varying the brightness in the second luminance of the first light-emitting unit is, during execution of the previous SL-up operation, the second least bright given than the luminance of the light emitting means and the second luminance It is a configuration that becomes the brightness of.

This has the effect that the operating member can be suitably operated.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit in the state which the 2nd slide operation unit is attached to the rear case. It is a front view of the operation unit in a state where a standing object is operating in an overhanging position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the tilting accessory is operated in the overhanging position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide accessory is operated in the overhanging position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state that each slide accessory and the tilting accessory are operated at the overhanging position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide accessory and the standing accessory are operated at the overhanging position. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where each slide accessory and the central swinging accessory are operated at the overhanging position. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation start condition table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the load reference value table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the power-return operation table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the accessory operation setting table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. (A) and (b) are diagrams exemplifying the contents of the accessory compound reach effect. It is a figure which illustrated the content of the alternative production of the character compound reach production. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the contents of the opening effect. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the origin return process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory control process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the timed change of the LED current when the current dimming method is adopted in the second embodiment, and (b) is the LED when the PWM dimming method is adopted in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timekeeping change of an electric current. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory operation stop processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the backlight control process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the composite operation unit according to the third embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the hemispherical accessory according to the third embodiment, (b) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory according to the third embodiment, and (c) is a side view of the hemispherical accessory according to the third embodiment. It is a front view of the hemispherical accessory in. (A) to (d) are side views of the hemispherical accessory according to the third embodiment. (A) to (d) are side views of the light-shielding sensor and the light-shielding plate provided on the hemispherical accessory according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the positional relationship of a light-shielding sensor and a light-shielding plate in 3rd Embodiment, and the output of a light-shielding sensor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an operation start condition table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a load reference value table in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the power supply restoration operation table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the origin return process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory lighting control processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory lighting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a hemispherical accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an operation start condition table in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a load reference value table in the modified example of the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a power supply recovery operation table in the modified example of the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the power supply restoration operation for each accessory in the modified example of the first embodiment. .. It is a figure which shows the accessory operation setting table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory control process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the initial operation process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the operation start setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a stepping motor, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the excitation table and the correspondence between the excitation counter and the state of the stepping motor. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the priority table in the second modification of the first embodiment, and (b) is the priority in the second modification of the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of a table schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory control process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the adjustment control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the control timing of the LCD backlight and the accessory motor in the modified example of the second embodiment, and (b) is the LCD back in the modified example of the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the control of a light. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation start condition table in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) shows the contents of the origin return operation table in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the origin return process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hemispherical accessory return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the origin position setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the claw-shaped accessory return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the half-moon type accessory return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 14) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 228 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 228 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 228 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 228 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 228 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, in the game board 13, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown) on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. In addition to rails 61 and 62 (not shown), general winning openings 63, first entry opening 64, second entry opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed by router processing to form a base plate 60. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 14) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640, the first symbol display device 37a operates. The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A) and a time-saving jackpot (big hit B) are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "probability change jackpot" is a probability change jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 16 rounds, and the "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a transition to a special gaming state (big hit). It is a state of the game that is easy to play. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second entrance 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than during the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased to the second entrance 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time saving is increased (the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than usual. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The electric accessory 640a may be changed to increase the number of times it is opened more than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to form a third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at a normal entry port 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 14), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 14) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1,3,5,7,9" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice production will be performed by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, a lottery is made as to whether or not the ball has hit. If the result of the lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol). If the lottery result of winning or not is wrong, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display device after the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

It should be noted that during the probabilistic change or the time reduction, the probability of the electric accessory 640a being opened or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit is increased by other methods (for example, increasing the probability of hitting a normal symbol). When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set shorter than during the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal ball entry port 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board It is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a winning lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37a. , 37b and is also lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding times, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by alternately lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol (a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x") in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. , The first symbol display device 37a, 37b and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of assembled ball entrances 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in the front view, a second entrance 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 14), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640 are different (for example, the number of first entry balls). The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the mouth 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 may be five).

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is higher than during the normal transition, and the time required for the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is short. Therefore, since the symbol of "○" is easily displayed in the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol), the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. be. Further, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, the first entry port without an electric accessory is present. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. , It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the normal ball entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entry port 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second entry port 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and is passed through the normal entry port 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim to win a big hit by winning a prize in the second entrance 640 while opening the electric accessory.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed, and the ball cannot win a prize or is in a closed state where it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a are not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first ball entry port 64 and the lower left side of the first ball entry port 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, the first slide operation unit 500 is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). Further, a decorative accessory unit 700 is provided on the upper center of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 14). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 400 to 800 in the rear case 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300 with the disassembled operation unit 300 viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 7,
The state in which the second slide operation unit 800 is mounted on the rear case 310 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 300 is opened from the bottom wall portion 311 and the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311. A back case 310 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 300, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, the decorative accessory unit 700, and the second slide operation unit 800 are housed in the internal space of the rear case 310, respectively. It is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 312 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 312. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 311 in a manner surrounded by (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the second slide operation unit 800, a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 when viewed from the front.

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decorative accessory unit 700 are laminated on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800, respectively. It is arranged in a state and is housed in a rear case 310 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800) is laminated with another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) on the front side. Since it is arranged, the predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit in the front view.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the outline of the operation mode of the standing accessory 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the second slide operation unit 800 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 8, the upright accessory 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhanging position, and in FIG. 9, the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhanging position. In FIG. 10, the states in which the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the overhanging positions are shown.

As shown in FIG. 8, the swinging operation unit 400 swings toward an arm member 420 whose base end side is pivotally supported so as to swing, and a swinging end side opposite to the base end side of the arm member 420. It is provided with an upright accessory 410 that is pivotally supported, and these arm members 420 and the upright accessory 410 are operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Let me. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 are retracted below the opening 311a of the rear case 310 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the standing member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). ..

As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 500 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise with the tilting accessory 510 sliding diagonally downward and the rotation shaft 520a as the rotation axis. It is equipped with a character 520. The tilting accessory 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the tilting accessory 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 9, the tilting accessory 510 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 800 includes slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 formed so as to be slidable, and slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840, respectively. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5, the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 are retracted to the left and right outside of the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and the upper slide accessory 830 and the lower side are retracted. The side slide accessory 840 is retracted to the upper and lower sides of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 10, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is arranged in the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). NS.

Further, the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the overhanging position of the right slide accessory 810 is on the right side of the overhang position of the left slide accessory 820, and the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 interfere with each other. There is no (contact). Similarly, the upper slide accessory 830 and the lower slide accessory 840 are configured to operate on the same plane. As shown in FIG. 10, the overhanging position of the upper slide accessory 830 is above the overhanging position of the lower slide accessory 840, and the upper slide accessory 830 and the lower slide accessory 840 interfere with each other. There is no mutual contact.

Further, the plane on which the right slide accessory 810 and the left slide accessory 820 operate is closer to the game board 13 than the plane on which the upper slide accessory 830 and the lower slide accessory 840 operate. There is (see FIG. 10). Therefore, the operation of the upper slide accessory 830 or the lower slide accessory 840 is not hindered by the right slide accessory 810 or the left slide accessory 820. On the contrary, the upper slide accessory 830 or the lower slide accessory 840 does not hinder the operation of the right slide accessory 810 or the left slide accessory 820. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

The second slide operation unit 800 is formed so that the shape of the "heart" can be visually recognized from the front view in a state where the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 are overhanging.

Next, a case where a plurality of units constituting the operation unit 300 operate in a complex manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. First, FIG. 11 shows the operation unit 300 when the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the overhanging positions. It is a front view of.

As shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 operates with respect to the game board 13 on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800. That is, no matter what arrangement the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 is arranged, the operation of the tilting member 510 is not hindered (interfered). Further, no matter what arrangement the tilting member 510 is arranged, the operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is not hindered (interfered). Therefore, the degree of freedom of movement between the tilting member 510 and the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, so that the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is arranged between the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 500 and the third symbol display There is a gap of 800 minutes for the second slide operation unit with the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from seeing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left-right direction).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are both arranged at the overhanging positions. As a result, the gaps that the player looks into from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840. As a result, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

FIG. 12 shows a case where the upright accessory 410 of the swing operation unit 400, the arm member 420, and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the overhanging positions. It is a front view of the operation unit 300.

As shown in FIG. 12, the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 operate on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 with respect to the game board 13. That is, regardless of the arrangement of the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800, the operation of the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420 is hindered (interfered). There is no. Further, regardless of the arrangement of the standing accessory 410 and the arm member 420, the operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is not hindered (interfered). Therefore, the degree of freedom of operation with the standing accessory 410, the arm member 420, and each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 can be increased, so that the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

Here, since the second slide operation unit 800 is arranged between the rocking operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the rocking operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 There is a gap of 800 minutes for the second slide operation unit. Therefore, when only the upright object 410 of the swinging operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhanging position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized from the front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from seeing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left-right direction).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the standing accessory 410 of the swing operation unit 400 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are both arranged at the overhanging positions. As a result, the gaps that the player looks into from an oblique direction can be filled with the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 300 can be improved.

FIG. 13 shows the operation unit 300 when the central swinging accessory 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 are arranged at the overhanging positions. It is a front view of. Here, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative accessory unit 700 includes a left swinging accessory 710, a central swinging accessory 720, and a right swinging accessory 730, and the central swinging accessory 720. Is operated between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Further, the decorative unit 700 swings each of the swinging accessories 710, 720, and 730 at the retracted position (origin position) (see FIG. 5).

The central rocking accessory 720 is arranged on the front side of the left rocking accessory 710 and the right rocking accessory 730 with respect to the game board 13 (that is, the central rocking accessory 720 is arranged). , The left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730 are not on the same plane), so even if the left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730 are swung, the center swinging role It does not interfere (contact) with the object 720. Further, even if the central rocking accessory 720 is subjected to a swinging operation or an overhanging operation, it does not interfere with (contact) the left swinging accessory 710 or the right swinging accessory 730. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rocking accessories 710, 720, and 730 from interfering with each other's movements of the other rocking accessories, and to increase the degree of freedom of operation. Therefore, the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

Further, the central rocking accessory 720 is arranged on the game board 13 in front of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840. Therefore, the central rocking accessory 720 and the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 can be operated without interfering with each other. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of operation can be increased, the effect of the operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

The box-shaped unit 600 does not have a member that projects to the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) as provided in the other operating units 400, 500, 700, 800. .. Therefore, the box-shaped unit 600 is always kept in a state of being arranged on the left side (see FIG. 5) of the opening 311a of the rear case 310.

In this way, each of the units 400 to 800 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the units 400 to 800 are arranged in a stacked state, so that each of the units 400 to 800 As for the ones in which the layers are arranged differently, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 311a of the back case 310, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 13, each unit 400 to 800 can be operated independently, and these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The units 400 to 700 are arranged in the same layer, and the units 400 to 700 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7). In other words, when the accessory included in any of the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, and the decorative accessory unit 700 is in the overhanging position, the accessory included in the other unit. If you move the slides to the overhanging position, they will interfere with each other (contact). Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, operating conditions are defined for each unit in order to prevent the accessories constituting the units arranged in the same layer from interfering with each other. When operating the accessory that constitutes any of the units 400 to 700, the operation of the accessory is permitted only when it is determined that the accessory does not interfere with the other unit. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accessories from colliding with each other and being damaged by the impact of the collision. In addition, since the movement of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, the operation of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are deviated from each other, giving the player a sense of discomfort. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of accessories are provided in order to execute various motion effects. Each of these accessories is driven by a corresponding accessory motor 229 (see FIG. 14). Here, if each accessory motor 229 is driven indefinitely, a current (electric power) exceeding the usable current capacity (rated power) of the accessory motor 229 is consumed, and normal operation can be performed. There is a risk that it will disappear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total value of the load current values (power consumption) consumed by driving each accessory is calculated, and the total value of the load current values (power consumption) is the above-mentioned. When it is determined that the current capacity (less than or equal to the rated power) is exceeded, the drive of a part or all of the accessory motor 229 is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load current (electric power) exceeding the usable current capacity (rated power) of the accessory motor 229 from being consumed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning or malfunctioning. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not to stop the accessory may be performed depending on whether or not the total load current exceeds the current capacity, or whether or not the total power consumption exceeds the rated power. good. Based on the specifications of the power supply device 15 used in the pachinko machine 10, the one with stricter conditions may be selected as the discriminant symmetry.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , At least the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 15 (b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is specified in association with each other. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot B is associated and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 15 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 15 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device, a display setting on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes one execution area, four holding areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (special figures 1 holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas corresponding to the second entrance 640 (special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas). A special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of special drawing 2 holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a first ball is set according to the timing of entering the first ball opening 64. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches a maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. When the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "7" is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/300".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are It is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/30".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time and the random number that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability time. Random numbers that are the jackpots for each are set so that they do not overlap with the numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as a random value that becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that the timing at which the random value appears will be analyzed. That is, there is a possibility that a big hit may be illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze the random value that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 15B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that either of the two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. There is. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 15B). , This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement" Various "special reach" are defined, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A, Various types of "special reach" are stipulated, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hits and misses. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the second hit. When the value of the random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be the hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol). In addition, this second hit random number table is used for the low probability of the second symbol (normal symbol) (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and with a high probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for time (the period during which the normal symbol is in a time-shortened state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of winning random values is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is "0.2 seconds x 1 time." However, the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and it is attached to the second entrance 640. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C), which stores the random number value for determining whether or not the symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4, is stored in the ROM 202. It is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is only "1 second x 2 times". It will be released, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203c, and a special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203d. It has a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and a time saving medium counter 203g.

The special symbol hold ball storage area 203a includes one execution area, four hold areas corresponding to the first entry port 64 (special figure 1 hold first area to special figure 1 hold fourth area), and a second entry. It has four holding areas (special figure 2 holding first area to special drawing 2 holding fourth area) corresponding to the ball mouth 640. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is transferred to the first ball opening 64. Among the vacant areas of the corresponding four reserved areas (Special Figure 1 Hold 1st Area to Special Figure 1 Hold 4th Area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. .. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

The same applies to the case where the ball enters the second entry port 640. That is, at the timing when the ball wins the second entry port 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data corresponds to the second entry opening 640 4 Among the vacant areas of the two reserved areas (Special Figure 2 Hold 1st Area to Special Figure 2 Hold 4th Area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. Further, when data is stored in all four holding areas corresponding to the second entrance 640, nothing is newly stored.

When the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each of them stored in either the special figure 1 hold first area or the special figure 2 hold first area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a lottery of a special symbol based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (lottery of the special figure 2) is performed, and the ball moves to the first entry port 64. It is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of special symbols based on the entry of a ball (lottery of special figure 1). That is, when the data is stored in the special figure 2 hold 1st area, the special figure 2 hold 1 area is stored in the shift process regardless of whether or not the data is stored in the special figure 1 hold 1 area. The stored data is shifted to the execution area.

When data is shifted from the hold 1 area to the execution area of either the special figure 1 hold 1 area or the special figure 2 hold 1 area, the hold 1 area where the data shift is performed becomes empty. Become. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) at the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning prize. Immediately, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S407 and S414 in FIG. 30). When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the first entry ball is entered. The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 64 is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S206 in FIG. 28).

The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the second entry ball is entered. The number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth 640 is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value of 4 (see S411 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S209 in FIG. 28).

The value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding of the fluctuation display based on the entry into the first ball entry port 64 N1) and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d (the second ball entry port). The hold number N2) of the variation display based on the entry into the 640 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S207 and S210 in FIG. 28 and S405 and S412 in FIG. 30). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the values of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203d are changed. Is.

The voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the values of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203d are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the maximum number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 31).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S603: No in FIG. 32).

The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). When this probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). show. The initial value of the probability variation flag 203f is set to off, and when the jackpot A (probability variation jackpot) is won, the probability variation flag 203f is set to on when setting the end of the jackpot A.

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the probability variation flag 203f is referred to, and if it is on, the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203f is off. For example, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 29).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203g is set to zero, and when the jackpot B (time saving jackpot) is won, the value is set to 100 when setting the end of the jackpot B. That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203 g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for the low probability time (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 31).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 228, the accessory motor 229, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The accessory motor 229 is composed of, for example, a known stepping motor, and is provided in plurality in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. The accessory motor 229 is driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives the corresponding accessory motor 229 based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC whose operation can be set for a plurality of accessory motors 229, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers). ) May be provided to operate the accessory motors 229 corresponding to different accessories. When a motor control IC (motor driver) whose operation can be set for a plurality of accessory motors 229 is adopted, the type of accessory motor 229 to be driven is sent to a command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like. It suffices to include the information for identifying the above and output it.

When the control IC (motor driver) operates the accessory motor 229 based on the set command, the operation is executed for the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every time the operation of one step is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the signal has been made is output. From this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin position. That is, the origin position is set as the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal from the control IC is received. More specifically, the value is added by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin position to the overhanging position. In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the overhanging position to the origin position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is a position where the origin shifts when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position, and if the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the accessory is used until the origin sensor detects that it is on. (That is, drive the accessory motor 229). This origin position serves as a reference position for the operation of each accessory. The above-mentioned step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by returning to the origin (that is, when the origin sensor detects on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by 1 based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

An example of control of the accessory motor 229 by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual accessory motor 229 has one step. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

First, FIG. 88A is a diagram showing an outline of a accessory motor 229 composed of a stepping motor. The accessory motor 229 is configured to excite a portion corresponding to the excitation control data by sending excitation control data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by the excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 88 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the accessory motor 229 is "1", the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is "0". If so, it will not be excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 88B) provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used for selecting and setting one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 88B). It is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from "0", and when the value is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes "3", the value returns to "0". It has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the accessory motor 229 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). In addition, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1"-> "0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the accessory motor 229 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether it is in the positive direction or the negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are predetermined for each type of accessory for which the operation is set. The maximum value of this excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the accessory motor 229. Specifically, for example, in the case of the accessory motor 229 that rotates once in one step (that is, 360 steps are required for the motor to rotate once), the excitation counter is in the range of "0" to "359". It becomes a loop counter to be updated.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88B is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table in which the excitation control data is defined and the state of the accessory motor 229 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 88B, excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), as sequence data corresponding to the accessory motor 229, the excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" is performed in the order of the excitation counters "0" to "3". Each data is specified. Further, when "1100", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "0", is set, the positions A and B of the accessory motor 229 are excited. Further, when "0110", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. Further, when "0011", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "2", is set, the positions C and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from. Further, when "1001", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "3", is set, the positions A and D of the accessory motor 229 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 88, each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction, the accessory motor 229 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the accessory motor 229 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

In this way, the control of the accessory motor 229 has been described with a simplified operation model, but in the accessory motor 229 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is updated once for each step (that is, the excitation counter is updated once). It can be rotated once (every time it is done). That is, when each accessory is changed, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set each time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be changed accurately.

In addition, each accessory has a unique operation pattern set according to the effect. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time. For example, as an operation pattern of the standing accessory 410, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated in the forward direction by 10 steps in the period from the timing of the start of operation to the elapse of 0.2 seconds. ing. That is, at the operation start timing of the standing accessory 410, the number of operation steps is set to 10 for the motor driver, the positive direction (direction toward the overhanging position) is set as the rotation direction, and the rotation speed is set every 20 ms. An operation pattern for outputting a command for setting a rotation speed (0.2 seconds / 10 steps) for one-step operation is specified. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and 10 steps are performed when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of operation.

Further, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated 160 steps in the forward direction for 1.6 seconds from 0.2 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the operation start timing. That is, when 0.2 seconds have passed from the operation start timing of the standing accessory 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 10), 160 operation steps are set for the motor driver. The operation pattern that outputs a command to set the forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and set the rotation speed (1.6 seconds / 160 steps) to operate one step every 10 ms as the rotation speed. It is stipulated. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and 170 steps (160 steps + 10 steps until 0.2 seconds have elapsed) have been operated 1.8 seconds after the start of operation.

Further, it is stipulated that the accessory motor 229 is operated 10 steps in the forward direction for 0.2 seconds from 1.8 seconds to 0.2 seconds after the operation start timing. That is, when 1.8 seconds have passed from the operation start timing of the standing accessory 410 (that is, when the value of the step counter becomes 170), 10 operation steps are set for the motor driver. The operation pattern that outputs a command to set the forward direction (direction toward the overhang position) as the rotation direction and set the rotation speed (0.2 seconds / 10 steps) to operate one step every 20 ms as the rotation speed. It is stipulated. Based on this command, the accessory motor 229 is driven by the motor driver, and 180 steps (170 steps up to 10 steps + 1.8 seconds) have been operated 2.0 seconds after the start of operation. It should be noted that this position coincides with the overhanging position (see FIG. 8) of the standing accessory 410.

Then, the operation pattern is defined so that the stop command for setting the operation stop for 2 seconds is set. After stopping at the overhanging position for 2 seconds, the operation pattern is defined so that the operation for returning the standing accessory 410 to the origin position is executed. Specifically, 4 seconds after the start of operation, the number of operation steps is set to 10 times, the negative direction (direction toward the origin position) is set as the rotation direction, and the rotation speed is one step every 20 ms. The operation pattern to output the command to set is specified. As a result, it is possible to return to the origin position side by 10 steps over 0.2 seconds.

Then, 4.2 seconds after the start of the operation (that is, 0.2 seconds after the start of the operation in the direction from the overhang position to the origin position), 160 times is set as the number of operation steps, and the rotation direction is negative. An operation pattern for setting a direction and outputting a command for setting a rotation speed for operating one step every 10 ms as a rotation speed is defined. As a result, it is possible to return to the origin position side by 160 steps over 1.6 seconds. Then, 5.8 seconds after the start of operation, a command is output for setting the number of operation steps to 10 times, setting the negative direction as the rotation direction, and setting the rotation speed for operating one step every 10 ms as the rotation speed. The operation pattern to be performed is specified. As a result, it can be returned to the origin position.

By operating according to this operation pattern, the standing object 410 can be moved to the overhanging position for 2 seconds, stopped at the overhanging position for 2 seconds, and then returned to the origin position for 2 seconds. .. It is the accessory motor 229 that makes the operating speed (rotational speed of the accessory motor 229) slower than the rotation speed set in other periods immediately after the start of operation or after the operation stop period elapses. This is to excite normally. That is, when the stopped accessory motor 229 is started to operate, if the rotation speed is too fast (the frequency of the pulse output from the motor driver is too high), the accessory motor 229 is based on the excitation control data. The excitation based on the next excitation control data may be started before the is excited, and the accessory motor 229 may not be able to be excited (stepped out) in the order of the excitation control data. .. Therefore, when the operation of the accessory motor 229 is started, the rotation speed is set to be relatively slow so that the output interval of the excitation control data is not too short, and the accessory motor 229 is out of step. Is suppressed.

Further, before stopping the accessory motor 229 (a period of 1.8 seconds to 2 seconds after the start of operation and a period of 5.8 seconds to 6 seconds), the rotation speed is slower than the rotation speed set in other periods. The reason for this is to ensure that the rotation of the accessory motor 229 is stopped at the number of steps to be stopped. That is, by slowing the rotation speed and lengthening the output interval of the excitation control data, it is possible to lengthen the period from the last output of the excitation control data to the output of the stop command. Can be received more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the stop command and surely stop the rotation of the accessory motor 229 at a predetermined timing.

As described above, the accessory motor 229 of the present embodiment is configured so that the motor rotates once each time the excitation control data of 1 is set. This one-step operation is configured so that each time new excitation control data is set, the motor is instantly excited by the new setting and rotates once. The period from the start to the end of this one-step (one-degree) operation is constant regardless of the setting interval of the excitation control data (update interval of the excitation counter). That is, the load current (power consumption) required to operate the motor one step (one degree) is constant regardless of the setting interval of the excitation control data. Therefore, the longer the setting interval of the excitation control data, the more one step. The frequency of consuming load current (electric power) decreases. Therefore, the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is also reduced. Therefore, by setting the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 slower than other periods immediately after the start of operation, after the lapse of the operation stop period, and before the stop of operation, the load current (consumption) is set in these periods. Power) can be lowered. Therefore, when the operation start timing of one accessory is slightly before the operation stop timing of the other accessory (that is, the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 is slowed down toward the operation stop). It is possible to prevent the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 for varying these accessories from becoming too high.

In this way, the control content of the accessory motor 229 has been described by taking the standing accessory 410 as an example, but similarly, the control content (the content of the command output to the motor driver) also serves for the other accessory. It is defined in the motor control command setting table (not shown) provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in association with the elapsed time from the operation start timing of the object. In addition, the operation pattern is defined for each accessory and for each type of effect. When setting the operation of the accessory, each accessory can be easily output by simply outputting the command specified in the motor control command setting table (not shown) at the timing specified in the motor control command setting table. A predetermined operation can be set for.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting a command for the motor driver, the accessory motor 229 can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of production operations using the accessory.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the accessory motor 229 has completed the operation based on the command set for the motor driver, based on the number of steps in which the accessory motor 229 has operated. That is, the operation set in the accessory motor 229 is completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal output from the motor driver is received each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver. It is judged whether or not it has been done, but it is not limited to this. For example, it is configured to measure the elapsed time since the command for operating the accessory motor 229 is set, and determine whether or not the operation of the accessory motor 229 is completed based on the elapsed time. You may.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 228, and when the frame button 228 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, operation error or vibration error of the accessory) indicated by the received error command without delay. ..

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 defines at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, a power supply recovery operation table 222d, and an accessory operation setting table 222e. ..

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the mode of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It's a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S1704 in FIG. 43).

The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that defines the operation start conditions when the operation of each accessory is started. The operation start condition table 222b defines operation start conditions for each group composed of one or a plurality of accessories. By operating each group according to this operation start condition, each accessory can be changed without interference (contact) between the accessories.

Here, the group refers to a set of one or a plurality of accessories that do not interfere with each other even if the constituent accessories are changed at the same time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, five groups from groups 1 to 5 are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the accessory is operated, in principle, it is configured to perform a predetermined operation for each group, and the pachinko machine 10 can be operated independently or a plurality of groups can be operated at the same time (compositely). By operating it, a wide variety of effects can be realized. The operation predetermined for each group is defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured to read the operation content from the ROM 222 and set it at the start of the operation of each group.

Group 1 is composed of each accessory provided in the second slide operation unit. When the operating conditions are satisfied, the group 1 operates each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), and then moves the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the origin position (see FIG. 5). A series of operations of returning to (see) is executed. Group 2 is composed of each accessory provided in the first slide operation unit 500, and when the operation conditions are satisfied, the group 2 tilts while rotating the rotating accessory 520 clockwise with the rotating shaft 520 as the rotating axis. After moving the accessory 510 to the overhanging position (see FIG. 11), the tilting accessory 510 is returned to the origin position (see FIG. 5) while rotating the rotating accessory 520 counterclockwise. The action is performed.

Group 3 is composed of each accessory provided in the swing operation unit 400, and when the operation conditions of group 3 are satisfied, the standing accessory 410 is operated to the overhanging position (see FIG. 8), and then the standing accessory is used. A series of operations of returning the object 410 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) is executed. Group 4 is composed of the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 among the accessories provided in the decorative accessory unit 700, and when the operating conditions are satisfied, the right swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 710, and the left swinging accessory 730. A series of operations are executed in which the left swinging accessory 730 swings at the origin position (see FIG. 5) and then stops at the origin position (see FIG. 5).

The group 5 is composed of the central swinging accessory 720 among the accessories provided in the decorative accessory unit 700, and is configured to be able to execute two types of operations according to the effect. Specifically, a series of operations in which the swing operation is performed at the origin position (see FIG. 5) and then stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and the overhang position (see FIG. 5) from the origin position (see FIG. 5). A series of operations of descending to the origin position (see FIG. 5) and then returning to the origin position (see FIG. 5) can be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of groups are provided, and each group is configured to perform a predetermined operation. As a result, one group can be operated independently, or a plurality of groups can be operated at the same time (composite), so that a wide variety of effects can be realized. Further, if the operations of a plurality of accessories are configured to be set independently one by one, the operating conditions become complicated. That is, at the time of starting the variable effect or at the operation start timing of the accessory such as in the middle of the effect, it is determined whether or not to start the operation of each accessory, and further, the operation corresponding to the accessory to be started. Need to be set respectively. On the other hand, if a group is defined as in the present embodiment, a simple process of selecting a group to be operated and setting a predetermined operation for the selected group is simply performed. Each accessory can be operated appropriately. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Of the swaying accessories 710, 720, 730 that make up the decorative accessory unit 700, the other oscillating accessories 710, 730 are grouped (group 5) in which only the central oscillating accessory 720 is different. There is no risk of interfering with the accessory contained in the other unit, whereas the central swinging accessory 720 has another accessory (standing accessory 410 or tilting accessory) when it descends to the overhanging position. This is because there is a risk of interfering with the object 510). That is, if all the accessories constituting the decorative accessory unit 700 are grouped in the same group, the central rocking accessory 720 must be operated at a timing that does not interfere with other accessories, so that the left swinging accessory This is because it results in limiting the operation of the 710 and the right swinging accessory 730. In order to prevent this, in the present embodiment, the central rocking accessory 720 is grouped differently from the left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730, and the left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730 are grouped. The degree of freedom of movement of the object 730 is increased.

The above-mentioned operation start condition table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b. As shown in FIG. 17A, the operation start condition table 222b defines the operation start conditions for each group. Specifically, as the operating condition of the group 2, it is stipulated that the accessories constituting the group 3 and the group 5 are both at the origin position. This means that the standing accessory 410 included in the group 3 or the central swinging accessory 720 included in the group 5 operates in the overhanging position, and the tilting accessory 510 included in the group 2 operates in the overhanging position. This is because there is a risk of collision with the standing accessory 410 or the central swinging accessory 720.

Further, as an operating condition of the group 3, it is stipulated that both the accessory members constituting the group 2 and the group 5 are at the origin position. This means that the tilting part agent 510 included in the group 2 or the central rocking accessory 720 included in the group 5 operates in the overhanging position, and the standing accessory 410 included in the group 3 operates in the overhanging position. This is because there is a risk of collision with the tilting accessory 510 or the central swinging accessory 720.

Further, as an operating condition of the group 5, it is stipulated that both the accessory members constituting the group 2 and the group 3 are at the origin position. This means that the tilting accessory 510 included in the group 2 or the standing accessory 410 included in the group 3 operates in the overhanging position, and the central swinging accessory 720 included in the group 5 operates in the overhanging position. This is because there is a risk of collision with the tilting accessory 510 or the standing accessory 410.

On the other hand, the operation start conditions are not specified for groups 1 and 4. This is because the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 constituting the group 1, the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 forming the group 5 are arranged in any arrangement. This is because the positional relationship is such that there is no risk of interfering with the operation of other accessories.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by setting the operating conditions of the accessory in each group, it is possible to prevent the accessories of different groups from interfering with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accessories from colliding with each other and damaging the accessories due to the impact of the collision. In addition, since the movement of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, the operation of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are deviated from each other, giving the player a sense of discomfort. It can be suppressed that it ends up. Further, since the operating conditions may be set for each group instead of setting the operating conditions for each accessory, the design can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory at the time of designing. In addition, it is sufficient to prepare a table for setting the operating conditions for each group, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting the operating conditions for each accessory, and the operating conditions for each group are defined. Therefore, the amount of data in the operation start condition table 222b can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

In the present embodiment, five groups are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of groups may be reduced, for example, three groups may be provided. As a result, the amount of data in the data table can be further reduced. Further, the number of groups may be increased, and the group may be composed of, for example, seven groups. As a result, the movement of the accessory can be set in more detail, so that the degree of freedom of the production movement can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The load reference value table 222b is a data table in which a value (drive load reference value) corresponding to a load current (power consumption) for driving each accessory motor 229 is specified for each accessory. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the load reference value table 222b, the total value of the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the accessory to be driven is the current capacity (rated power). (The total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100) is determined. Then, when it is determined that the load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the driving of the accessory to be newly driven is canceled.

The details of the load reference value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 17B, the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B) shows the load current (consumption) with respect to the drive load reference value (current capacity (rated power)) for each accessory constituting the group. The ratio of electric power) is specified.

Specifically, the drive load reference value when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) is driven is 15 in each case. Is. That is, when the accessory motors 229 corresponding to the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, and 840 are driven, the load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value 15 is consumed. Therefore, when the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 (group 1) are changed at the same time (see FIG. 10), it corresponds to the drive load reference value 60 (15 × 4). Load current (power) is consumed. Therefore, even if all the accessories of Group 1 are changed at the same time, there is a margin of 40 for the current capacity (rated power) in terms of the drive load reference value, so that the current capacity (rated power) is within the range. , Can be operated at the same time as other groups of accessories.

Further, the drive load reference value when the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the tilting accessory 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 (group 2) is driven is 30, and the accessory corresponding to the rotating accessory 520. The drive load reference value when the motor 229 is driven is 10. Therefore, when the accessories constituting the group 2 are changed at the same time, the load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value 40 (30 + 10) is consumed. The rotating accessory 520 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise with the rotating shaft 520a as the rotating shaft, but the drive load reference value is the same regardless of which direction the rotating accessory 520 is rotated (10). ).

Group 3 is composed of only the standing accessory 410 of the swinging operation unit 400. The drive load reference value corresponding to the standing accessory 410 is 15, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the standing accessory 410, the load current (electric power) corresponding to the drive load reference value of 15 is generated. Be consumed.

Group 4 is composed of a left swinging accessory 710 and a right swinging accessory 730 among the accessories constituting the decorative accessory unit 700. As shown in FIG. 17, the load reference values corresponding to these are all 10, and the drive load reference value becomes 10 by driving the accessory motors 229 corresponding to the swinging accessories 710 and 730. A corresponding load current (electric power) is consumed.

Group 5 is composed of only the central swinging accessory 720 of the decorative accessory unit 700. The drive load reference value corresponding to the central rocking accessory 720 is 15, and by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the central rocking accessory 720, the load current corresponding to the drive load reference value of 15 is driven. (Power) is consumed.

In the present embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 17B), the variable accessory and the accessory motor corresponding to the newly variable accessory Control is performed so that the total load current (power consumption) of 229 is equal to or less than the current capacity (less than or equal to the rated power). More specifically, the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory motor 229 being driven and the drive load reference value of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the newly variable accessory are added, and the total is 100. Determine if it exceeds. Then, when it is determined that the load current (power) exceeds 100 (that is, the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly changing the accessory), the combination to be newly changed is used. It is configured to stop the movement of objects.

Here, conventionally, there are fewer types of accessories compared to recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. It never happened. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also been increasing. Therefore, when a plurality of accessories are operated at the same time, a load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device that controls the accessory may shut down, the power of the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory may occur. There was a risk that a problem such as a shutdown would occur.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the accessory to be newly operated is used. Since the operation is canceled, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity or less (rated power or less). That is, it is possible to prevent the load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the accessory operation is abnormal. Can be suppressed from occurring.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order not to exceed the current capacity, the operating conditions are not set in detail for each accessory motor 229, but simply a new drive of the accessory motor 229 is attempted. In this case, it is determined whether or not the drive load reference value exceeds a predetermined value (100), and whether or not to newly drive the accessory motor 229 is determined. That is, the driving of the accessory motor 229 within the range of the current capacity or less is realized by a relatively simple process. Therefore, the designer of the pachinko machine 10 only needs to describe a simple discrimination process in the program, and does not need to specify in detail the conditions for changing each accessory in the data table or the like. The amount of work can be reduced. Further, since the amount of data in the data table or the like can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage capacity.

In the load reference value table 222c of the present embodiment, only one type of load reference value corresponding to each accessory is specified, but the load reference value is not limited to this. Further, for example, the drive load reference value when each accessory motor 229 is rotated at a normal speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at a normal time interval) and the drive load reference value are higher than usual. Two types may be provided with a drive load reference value when the motor is rotated at a slow speed (when each operation step of the accessory motor 229 is set at a time interval longer than usual). In this case, if the total drive load reference value when set to the normal speed exceeds 100, the total drive load reference value becomes 100 or less by rotating the motor at a speed slower than usual. It may be controlled as follows. When the operation step interval of the accessory motor 229 is lengthened, the average value of the load current (electric power) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is reduced, so that the drive load reference value can also be set to a small value.

Further, as the operation pattern of the accessory, the operation speed may be changed in the middle of the operation (that is, the rotation speed of the motor may change), and the drive load reference value for each operation speed may be specified. .. For example, the accessory control motor 229 is configured to operate at a lower speed than other operation periods (operation period for normal speed) within 1 second after the start of operation and within 1 second before the end of operation. However, the drive load reference value for low speed and the drive load reference value for normal speed may be defined. Thereby, for example, when the operation start timing of one accessory is within 1 second before the end of the operation of the other accessory, the drive load reference value for low speed can be referred to instead of the normal speed. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there is a risk of exceeding the current capacity (rated power) by starting the operation.

The power recovery operation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when executing a power recovery operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. The power recovery operation is executed every time the power is turned on (regardless of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In this power supply return operation table 222d, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223f. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the accessories by the return operation, an error command is set (see S1503 in FIG. 41). This error command contains information indicating the type of error and the location of the error. Upon receiving this error command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. In this way, by performing the return operation based on the power-on, it is possible to quickly grasp whether or not an abnormality has occurred in each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from starting the game for the player without noticing that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (return to the origin) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222d. That is, when the power is cut off in the middle of changing the accessory, the power return operation is executed after the origin is returned based on the power is turned on. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare one type of power recovery operation that starts from the origin position (it is necessary to specify different patterns of power recovery operations depending on the arrangement of the accessory when the power is turned on). Therefore, the amount of data in the power recovery operation table 222d can be reduced.

When the power is cut off during the variable operation of the accessory and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not backed up because the operation of the accessory is not executed. That is, once the power is cut off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the production that has been performed up to that point. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the origin return operation is executed and then the power return operation is performed. If the effect is in the middle when the power is cut off, a simple display effect is executed after the power is restored until at least the effect period elapses. This simple display effect (which will be described later, an effect using an image when the power is turned on) is configured so that the same effect is repeated until the end time of the effect regardless of the progress of the effect. It is possible to display the production immediately without requiring the progress of the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy because no effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until the effect period elapses. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the stored contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up, but the information stored in the RAM 223 may be retained even after the backup power is supplied and the power supply is cut off. As a result, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time when the power is turned off can be determined after the power is turned on, and the production can be executed continuously, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. be able to.

The details of the power recovery operation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the power recovery operation table 222d. As shown in FIG. 18, in the power supply return operation table 222d, the operation contents of the accessory are defined for each value of the return pointer 223f. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223f performs the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) every time the main process (see FIG. 39) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation is completed. It is updated one by one.

As shown in FIG. 18, the power recovery operation table 222d of the present embodiment (see FIG. 18).
Is configured to execute the return operation in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 → group 4 → group 5 according to the update of the return pointer 223f. Further, in the return operation, each accessory is changed from the origin position to the overhang position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the entire operating range in which the accessory may change during the normal game is comprehensively operated by the return operation. As a result, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

Further, in the power supply return operation table 222d of the present embodiment, the operation is stopped for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after each accessory is changed to the overhanging position. As a result, in addition to being able to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs during the operation to the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, it is possible to detect whether or not an abnormality occurs while the operation is stopped. can do. The abnormality during the operation stop is, for example, the case where the operation does not stop even though the operation stop is set, or the origin before the predetermined period (2000 ms) specified as the operation stop period elapses. This is the case where the product returns to the position, the operation of returning to the origin position is not started even after the operation stop period has elapsed, and so on.

Further, the power return operation table 222d of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period of a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the return operation of all the accessories in groups 1 to 5 is completed. There are. This stop period is used as a timing to end the confirmation and shut off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the control device on the sub side such as the voice lamp control device 113 starts up normally in the shipping inspection or the like. It is provided. That is, if the accessory operates immediately after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the origin and then shuts off the power supply or operates the accessory. The power supply must be shut off during the operation, and the accessory must be manually returned to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if the power is cut off during the operation stop period by providing the operation stop period after the return operation is completed, the power is cut off with all the accessories in the origin position. It can be in a state of being. Therefore, it is not necessary to wait until the position returns to the origin position or manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is cut off, so that the inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222e.

The details of the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e. As shown in FIG. 19, in the accessory operation setting table 222e, a timing for operating the accessory and a group of the accessories to be operated at the operation timing are defined for each corresponding effect.

Specifically, in the opening effect with an effect time of 5 seconds, the operation timing of the accessory is set at the start of the effect, and it is stipulated that the group of the accessory to be operated at the operation timing is group 1. .. That is, it is stipulated that the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 are operated according to the start of the opening effect. As described above, when the operating conditions of Group 1 are satisfied, the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 are operated from the origin position (see FIG. 5) to the overhang position (see FIG. 10), and then the origin. A series of operations of returning to the position (see FIG. 5) is executed. Further, as described above, the control contents (commands output to the motor driver for each elapsed time) for setting this series of operations are defined in the motor control command setting table (not shown).

Further, in the out-of-order super reach production with a production time of 20 seconds and the shared super reach production, it is stipulated that the characters of the group 4 and the group 5 are swung at the timing when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the production. There is. As described above, when the operating conditions of Group 4 are satisfied, the right swinging accessory 710 and the left swinging accessory 730 swing at the origin position (see FIG. 5), and then the origin position (FIG. 5). When a series of operations of stopping the operation is executed in (see 5) and the operating conditions for the rocking operation are satisfied in the group 5, the central rocking accessory 720 performs the rocking operation at the origin position (see FIG. 5). , A series of operations that stop at the origin position (see FIG. 5) are executed.

In addition, in the off-the-shelf super reach effect and the shared super reach effect, it is stipulated that the accessory of the group 2 is operated at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the effect. As described above, when the operating conditions of Group 2 are satisfied, the tilting accessory 510 is extended to the overhang position while rotating the rotating accessory 520 clockwise with the rotating shaft 520 as the rotating axis (see FIG. 11). After operating up to, a series of operations of returning the tilting accessory 510 to the origin position (see FIG. 5) is executed while rotating the rotating accessory 520 counterclockwise. By operating different characters at different timings, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation for a big hit.

Further, in the out-of-order special reach A and the shared special reach A in which the production time is 30 seconds, it is stipulated that the accessory of the group 3 is operated at the timing when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the production. As described above, when the operating conditions of Group 3 are satisfied, the standing accessory 410 is operated to the overhanging position (see FIG. 8), and then the standing accessory 410 is returned to the origin position (see FIG. 5). The operation of is executed.

After that, it is stipulated that the accessory of group 2 is operated at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, and the accessory of group 1 and group 3 is operated at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect ( That is, it is specified that the operation is performed so as to be in the state shown in FIG. The more the characters move, the more flashy the appearance of the production becomes, and the higher the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved. Therefore, by operating a plurality of groups (groups 1 and 3) in a complex manner at the end of the production, the player's expectation can be raised as the production progresses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the special reach B and the shared special reach B in which the production time is 30 seconds, the accessories of the group 1 and the group 2 are operated at the timing when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the production (that is, the state shown in FIG. 11). It is stipulated that (to operate). In addition, it is stipulated that the accessory of group 3 is operated at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the effect, and the accessory of group 1 and group 3 is operated at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect. Is stipulated. By setting the operation pattern of the accessory different from that of the out-of-order special reach A and the shared special reach A, it is possible to execute different modes of production even during the same production period. Therefore, the production can be diversified.

Further, in the special reach in which the production period is 30 seconds and is selected only when the jackpot A is won, the characters of group 1 and group 2 are operated at the timing when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the production (that is,). , Operate in the state shown in FIG. 11). Further, it is stipulated that the accessory of group 3 is operated at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the effect, and the accessory of group 1 is operated at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, and the accessory of group 5 is operated. It is stipulated that the accessory is to be lowered (that is, to be operated in the state shown in FIG. 13).

That is, until 25 seconds have passed from the start of the production, the movement pattern of the accessory is out of alignment and is the same as the special reach B and the shared special reach B, and only the movement after 25 seconds from the start of the production is different. Therefore, before 25 seconds have passed, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the player has a special reach B, a shared special reach, or a special reach from the movement of the accessory. Therefore, until the final stage of the production, 25 seconds or later, the player can be interested in watching whether the player wins or misses. In addition, when the character of Group 5 descends after 25 seconds have passed, the player recognizes that this production was a special reach (that is, it becomes a jackpot A after the end of the fluctuation production). Can be made to. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the jackpot will be a big hit before the end of the production, for the rest of the production period, the satisfaction of being a jackpot and the occurrence of the accessory action in which the jackpot is confirmed are generated. You can have a sense of accomplishment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222e, each group is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222e. On the other hand, it is possible to realize the movements of a wide variety of accessories only by executing the predetermined movements.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is not performed in all the variation effects, but the operation of the accessory is set only in a part of the variation effects having a relatively long fluctuation time. A fluctuation effect with a relatively long fluctuation time has a low probability of being selected as an effect for notifying the deviation, and is likely to be selected as an effect for notifying a jackpot. , It is possible to give the player a high expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the player as to whether or not the accessory operates, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory is configured to operate only in the opening effect and a part of the variable pattern effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to operate the accessory in other effects such as an ending effect and a round effect. In addition, the types of variable effects for operating the accessory may be increased so that the accessory can be operated even in the off-normal reach or the hit normal reach, for example. As a result, the production can be further diversified, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a load value storage area 223e, and a return pointer 223f. , The initialization flag 223g, the closing operation flag 223h, the accessory operation flag 223i, and the discrimination value storage area 223j are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a corresponds to one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first entrance 64 (special figure 1 first area to special drawing 1 fourth area), and a second entrance 640. It has four areas (special figure 2 first area to special figure 2 fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a hold of the variation effect held by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of times of waiting) up to 4 times for each type of ball entry port.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second entry ball port 640, the special figure 1 hold after the addition is added. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203d is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the fluctuation display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set. The indicated number of reserved balls command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 and the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203d is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1608 in FIG. 42). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 pattern hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command and the type of hold ball (whether the hold is based on the entry into the first entry port 64). , Is it a hold based on the entry into the second entry port 640?), And the number of reserved balls for the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1708 in FIG. 43). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The load value storage area 223e is a storage area in which a value (total drive load value) corresponding to the total load current supplied to the accessory motor 229 being driven is stored. This total drive load value is a value represented by the ratio of the load current value to the current capacity, similarly to the drive load reference value. For example, when each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 constituting the group 1 is variable, and the accessories constituting the other group are stopped, the drive load reference corresponding to the group 1 is used. The total value of 60 is stored in the load value storage area 223e.

Whether or not the current capacity is exceeded when the accessory is newly driven based on the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the drive load reference value corresponding to the newly variable accessory. It is configured to determine whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the total of the total drive load value and the newly variable drive load reference value exceeds 100. Then, when it is determined that the total exceeds 100 (that is, the load current supplied to the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity), the accessory corresponding to the accessory to be newly changed is determined. The drive of the motor 229 is canceled. As a result, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the range of the load current equal to or less than the current capacity, so that it is possible to prevent the load current from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory occurs. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed.

The return pointer 223f is used to select the operation data of the accessory from the power return operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) that defines the operation content of the return operation of the accessory that is executed based on the power-on. More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) executed at 1 ms intervals is executed, the return pointer 223f is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223f), and the update is performed. The operation of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223f is cleared to zero based on the power being cut off (the value becomes 0000H). Therefore, every time the power is turned on, the return operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power return operation table 222d.

The initialization flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for executing the return operation of the accessory that is executed based on the power-on. While the initialization flag 223g is on, the initial operation process (see FIG. 41), which is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory, is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, so that the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) is skipped (see S1401: No in FIG. 40). This initialization flag 223g is set to on in the origin return process (see S37) of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) (see S1206 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, in the initial operation process, it is set to off when it is determined that the return operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when the END information is read from the power return operation table 222d) (see S1513 in FIG. 41). ).

The turn-on operation flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the home return of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. When the closing operation flag 223h is on, it indicates that the origin return of the accessory is completed, and when it is off, it indicates that the origin return is not completed. This closing operation flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that the home return has been completed (see S1507 in FIG. 41). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so that the operation flag 223h at the time of turning on is also cleared (that is, turned off).

The accessory operation flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is variable. The accessory operation flag 223i is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. Specifically, in order from the lower bit, the right side slide accessory 810, the left slide accessory 820, the upper slide accessory 830, the lower slide accessory 840, the tilting accessory 510, the rotating accessory 520, and the standing accessory. The 410, the left swinging accessory 710, the right swinging accessory 730, and the central swinging accessory 720 are associated with each other.

Each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i indicates that the corresponding accessory is variable when the value is 1, and indicates that the corresponding accessory is stopped when the value is 0. The value of the free bit is fixed at 0. For example, if the upper byte of the accessory operation flag 223i is 00H (that is, 00000000000B in binary notation) and the lower byte is 40H (that is, 01000000B in binary notation), the standing accessory 410 is variable. Yes, it means that other characters are stopped. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i, the type of the accessory in operation can be specified.

The discriminant value storage area 223j is a storage area for storing discriminant values for discriminating whether or not the total load current supplied for driving the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity. Specifically, the value (discrimination value) obtained by adding the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223i and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory motor 229 to be newly driven is Be remembered. Based on whether or not this determination value is 100, it is determined whether or not a load current exceeding the current capacity is to be supplied, and if the current capacity is exceeded, a new accessory motor to be driven is determined. Cancel the drive of 229. As a result, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the range of the load current equal to or less than the current capacity, so that it is possible to prevent the load current from exceeding the current capacity. Therefore, when the current capacity is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory occurs. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power (driving current) to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 are transferred. The process of reading from the other bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , Fixed value data used in the control program (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, one page of NAND flash memory 234a) in the program of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to transfer to area 233a or data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. The amount of data is smaller than the image displayed during a normal game, and the image is simple. Therefore, the image data can be quickly transferred and the image can be displayed after the power is turned on.

When the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, during the display of the main image when the power is turned on, the display control device 114 Is on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the variable image when the power is turned on with the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol when the power is turned on. The fluctuating image is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuating period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, for example, even when the operation abnormality of the accessory is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 displays both the error type and the error occurrence location by the error command. Notify to. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. It has at least 233i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state. As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs (backs A to C) corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"). Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from the rear images A to C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 22).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, in the example of FIG. 22). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 35) (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 46B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later, which describes the instruction contents for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 46 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 46 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The opening data transfer flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to start the transfer of the image data used for the opening effect, and if it is on, it is the transfer timing of the image data used for the opening effect. show. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that it is not the transfer timing of the image data used for the opening effect.

The opening data transfer flag 233i is a display stop received from the voice lamp control device 113 in the stop type command process (see FIG. 48 (b)), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 47). It is set to ON when it is determined that the type command is a command indicating the stop type of the jackpot (see S2405 in FIG. 48). Further, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56), it is set to off when setting the transfer of the image data used for the opening effect (see S3510 in FIG. 56).

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 56). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, an example will be described in which the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation of various accessories are combined to produce one effect. First, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a reach effect (combined reach effect of an accessory) in which a display image and an operation of an accessory are combined. As described above in the description of FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to generate the above-mentioned accessory composite reach effect as a part of the effect executed when the reach occurs. In addition, the accessory compound reach effect is configured to easily appear in the case of a reach effect that is a big hit, and is configured to be difficult to appear in the case of an off-reach. As described above, the probability of winning the special symbol is 1/300 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/30 in the high probability state of the special symbol, so that most of the lottery is missed. Therefore, the frequency of appearance of the accessory compound reach effect, which is difficult to appear in the case of off-reach, is low.

In the example of FIG. 24, among the accessory composite reach effects, in the out-of-order special reach A or the shared special reach A, immediately before 8 seconds have passed from the start of the effect (see FIG. 24 (a)), and 8 seconds have passed. , The state in which the accessory is operated based on the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 24B) is shown. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the accessory composite reach effect, the right symbol row and the left symbol row stop at the same symbol (for example, "7" symbol) among the changing symbol rows (for example, "7" symbol). See FIG. 24 (a)). Then, before the middle symbol row is stopped, the standing accessory 410 is variably operated to the overhanging position (the central portion of the third symbol display device 81) (see FIG. 24 (b)). Although not shown, the swinging accessories 710, 720, and 730 constituting the decorative accessory unit are swung at the origin position. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the standing accessory 410 is operated to perform the accessory compound reach effect. Further, as described above, since the accessory compound reach effect is configured to easily appear when it becomes a big hit, it is possible to expect the player to become a big hit after the end of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded by newly operating the accessory motor 229, the drive of the accessory motor 229 is canceled. It is configured in. That is, there is a case where the standing character 410 cannot be changed even though the character compound reach effect is selected. For example, in the power return operation, when the transfer of all the resident images is completed and the start condition of the accessory composite reach effect is satisfied during the return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840. Is. In this case, since the load current corresponding to the drive load reference value of 60 is used to operate each slide accessory (group 1) (see FIG. 17B), the standing accessory 410 and the standing accessory 410 are further used. If the swinging accessories 710, 720, and 730 are operated, the load current exceeding the current capacity is consumed. It will be canceled. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect instead of the accessory compound reach effect so that the player can recognize that the character compound reach effect is used.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative effect. In this alternative effect, instead of changing the standing accessory 410 to the overhang position (see FIG. 24 (b)) in the accessory composite reach effect, the fish bounces on the middle symbol row portion of the third symbol display device 81. Display the image. This fish bouncing effect is configured so that it does not appear in any effect other than the alternative effect. Further, even when the standing accessory 410 moves to the overhanging position (see FIG. 24 (b)) in the accessory composite reach effect, the appearance is as if the fish jumped onto the water. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the alternative effect is an effect of the same system executed in place of the accessory compound reach effect. Therefore, even if the operation of the standing accessory 410 is canceled, the player can be expected to win a big hit after the reach effect is completed by displaying the alternative effect.

FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of an effect (opening effect) that notifies the player of the start of the big hit when the result of the variable effect is a big hit. In this opening effect, the operation of the group 1 is set, and a predetermined display effect (see FIG. 26A) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the second slide operation unit 800 operates to the overhanging position, and each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 of the third symbol display device 81 operates. The characters "Congratulations" are displayed in the display area corresponding to the "heart" -shaped opening formed by the above (see FIG. 26 (a)). By displaying the characters expressing the blessing in this way, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot state, which is an advantageous state for the player, has been reached. In addition, by swinging each of the swinging accessories 710, 720, and 730 at the origin position, the player's attention is more attracted to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible for the player to be sure that the jackpot will start. Therefore, as a result of the player not noticing the start of the jackpot and not launching the ball, it is possible to prevent the end condition of one or more rounds from being satisfied without winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a. can do.

As in the case of the accessory compound reach effect, the drive of the accessory motor 229 is canceled when it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded by newly operating the accessory motor 229. There is. That is, it may not be possible to change each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 even though it is the start timing of the opening effect. For example, the current capacity can be increased by operating the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 and the swinging accessories 710, 720, 730 by setting the start timing of the opening effect during the return operation of the accessory. For example, when a load current exceeding the load current is to be supplied. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an alternative effect instead of the opening effect so that the player can recognize that the jackpot is started.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of an alternative effect executed when the movement of the accessory is canceled in the opening effect. In this alternative effect of the opening effect, an image similar to the appearance when each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 operates to the overhanging position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, as in the normal opening effect, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even if the movement of each accessory is canceled, the player can easily recognize that it is the start timing of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of happiness due to the start of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 36. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d are acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 ( S204: No), then it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205).

In the process of S205, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S205: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S206). ), Set the hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation (S207). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S207, among the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the entry into the first entry port 64 is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the special figure 1 hold first area to the special figure 1 hold fourth area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, special figure 1 hold 1st area → execution area, special figure 1 hold 2nd area → special figure 1 hold 1st area, special figure 1 hold 3rd area → special figure 1 hold 2nd area, special figure 1 hold The data in each area is shifted in the order of FIG. 1 holding 4th area → special drawing 1 holding 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S212.

In the processing of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1. Then (S209), a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S210). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S210, among the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the entry into the second entry port 640 is shifted (S211). In the process of S211 the data stored in the special figure 2 hold 1st area to the special figure 2 hold 4 area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, special figure 2 hold 1st area → execution area, special figure 2 hold 2nd area → special figure 2 hold 1st area, special figure 2 hold 3rd area → special figure 2 hold 2nd area, special figure 2 hold The data in each area is shifted in the order of FIG. 2 holding 4th area → special drawing 2 holding 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S212.

In the process of S212 executed after the process of S208 or S211, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (variation effect) based on the data of the execution area is executed (S212). The details of this special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S213: No) has not elapsed, the display of the variation effect executed in the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S212) described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S217), and the process shifts to S220. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S217, the opening command is set when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, the opening effect (see FIG. 26 (a)) is executed, and the jackpot is started.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S218), and the time reduction is in progress. If the value of the counter 203g is 1 or more (S218: Yes), the value of the counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S218: No), the processing of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S220.

In the process of S220, a stop command for stopping and displaying the changing third symbol is set by the third symbol display device 81 (S220), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S212). This special symbol change start process (S212) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203f of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203f is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol.

When the probability variation flag 203f is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the value are high. Based on the first random number table 202a for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit of these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203f is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301. And, based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and "7" match, it is determined that the random number is the jackpot of the special symbol. .. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined which of the A and the jackpot B) is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B It is determined that the result is (time saving jackpot) (see FIG. 15 (b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are defined. , Various types of "shared normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and various types of "special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Is stipulated, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (that is, the special symbol is out of order) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of off is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (FIG. 35). NS. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the start winning information processing (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 27), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, and when there is a starting winning, the value indicated by various random number counters. This is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the hold process of and the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (S401: Yes), the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize at the first ball entry port 64, the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is If it is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S408. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special figure 1 is held. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty hold area (special figure 1 hold 1st area to special figure 1 hold 4 area) of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special figure 1 hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 1 hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 1 hold second area is set, if the value is 2, the special figure 1 hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the special figure 1 hold fourth area is set. , Each is the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing (whether or not the jackpot) of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result is set (S407), and the process shifts to S408.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the process of S401, when the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is not detected (S401: No), there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c In the processing of S408 executed when the value (N1) is 4, which is the maximum value (S403: No), and when the processing of S407 is completed, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Whether or not it is determined (S408). In this process of S408, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S408: Yes), the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S409), and the special figure 2 reserved ball It is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S410).

Then, whether or not there is a ball entering the second entry port 640 (S408: No), or even if there is a prize at the second entry port 640, the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is If it is not less than 4 (S410: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S408: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S410: Yes), the special figure 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S411). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S412).

The hold ball number command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later, in the same manner as the hold ball number command set in the process of S405. In the external output process (S901) of (see FIG. 35), the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S412, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty hold area (special figure 2 hold 1st area to special figure 2 hold 4 area) of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a (S413). In the process of S413, the value of the special figure 2 hold ball counter 203d is referred to as in the process of S406, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 hold second area is set, if the value is 2, the special figure 2 hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the special figure 2 hold fourth area is set. , Each is the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S413, the winning / failing (whether or not the jackpot) of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. Then, a winning information command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prediction result is set (S414), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric motor associated with the second ball entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S509). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second entering opening 640 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. The specific winning opening 65a is provided in the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the second entry opening 640 (see FIG. 2). Further, in the closed state of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball that has reached the specific winning opening 65a is guided to the lower right direction because the upper portion of the variable winning device 65 has a gentle inclination toward the lower right direction. Will be done. Therefore, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, many balls that do not enter the specific winning opening 65a and flow down to the lower right are the second entry. Enter the mouth 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 is maximized (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 15 (c)).

In the processing of S508, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S511. In the processing of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 15 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S514), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is currently being a big hit. Whether or not it is determined (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203 g is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S517), and shift to the process of S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device is performed. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S502: Yes). S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S523). In the processing of S523, a lottery of ordinary symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the third This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter The value (M) of 203e is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S812 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S812 even in such a case. The details will be described later in the description of the main process (see FIG. 35), but the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S833, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S83, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 35) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (S906), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first pattern is displayed. The variation display executed in the symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is set in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29). 1 Stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 31). do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If it is determined in the processing of S908 that the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909), and already If the predetermined time has elapsed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 34). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 35). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all eight rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1009, if it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect. If so (S1011: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1012), and this process ends. As the setting performed in the process of S1012, for example, when the jackpot to end is the jackpot A, the process of setting the probability variation flag 203f to ON, or when the jackpot to end is the jackpot B, the time is shortened. Examples thereof include a process of setting 100 in the counter 203 g. By executing the process of S1012, it is possible to shift to the gaming state according to the jackpot type based on the end of the ending effect. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, the arrangement of each accessory is confirmed, and the origin return process for returning the accessory deviated from the origin position to the origin position is executed (S1102). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but by executing this origin return process (S1102), the return operation of the accessory can be started from the origin position.

After that, by determining whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the power-off processing of S1317 is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of (see FIG. 39) (S1103). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1317. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1317 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1103: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1317. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1104).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1105 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1104: No), the process shifts to S1109.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1104: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1105. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1317 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1104: No), and the process proceeds to S1209.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1103: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1105 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1105, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1105). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1107). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1106: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1108), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1109). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1317 is executed (see S1316 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1317 is executed, the process of S1109 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1317 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1109: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1110), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1111), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Permission is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1109 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1109 is performed via the processes of S1105 to S1107. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1109: No), S1110, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1111), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1112), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1110 is that when the processing of S1109 is reached via the processing of S1105 to S1107, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1105. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the origin return process (S1102) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this origin return process. As described above, this origin return process is a process executed to return the accessory deviated from the origin position to the origin position when there is an accessory deviated from the origin position when the power is turned on.

When this origin return process (S1102) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory that deviates from the origin position. As a method of determining whether or not the accessory is deviated from the origin position, for example, the state (rotation angle, etc.) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory may be determined.

When it is determined by the processing of S1201 that there is an accessory deviated from the origin (S1201: Yes), first, all the accessories (each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840) constituting the group 1 are the origins. If it is determined whether or not it is in the position (S1202) and it is determined that all the accessories constituting the group 1 are in the origin position (S1202: Yes), it is determined that the accessory is deviated from the origin position in the processing of S1201. In order to return all the accessories to the origin position, the operation of the accessory motor 229 is started (S1205), and the process shifts to S1206.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the accessory constituting the group 1 is deviated from the origin position (S1202: No), it serves to return all the accessory other than the group 1 to the origin position. The object motor 229 is operated (S1203), and after the restoration is completed, the accessories constituting the group 1 are set to return to the origin (S1204), and the process shifts to S1206.

It should be noted that different processing is executed depending on whether or not it is necessary to return the group 1 to the origin position, that is, the accessory constituting the group 1 and the accessory constituting the other group are simultaneously placed at the origin position. This is because there is a possibility that a load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied to the accessory motor 229 during the home return return. That is, even if the drive load reference values of the groups 2 to 5 are totaled, it is only 90 (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, in order to return all the accessories of the groups 2 to 5 to the origin at the same time. Even if it is made variable, it does not exceed the current capacity. On the other hand, the total of the drive load reference values of the group 1 is 60, and there is a possibility that a load current exceeding the current capacity may be supplied when the drive load reference values of the group 1 are changed at the same time as the accessories constituting the other groups. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the accessory constituting the group 1 deviates from the origin position, the accessory of the group 1 is returned to the origin position at a timing different from that of the other groups. It is configured in. Therefore, when the accessory is returned to the origin, it is possible to prevent a problem such as a load current exceeding the current capacity being supplied and the voice lamp control device 113 being shut down.

If it is determined in the process of S1201 that there is no accessory that deviates from the origin position, the process of S1202 to S1205 is skipped and the process shifts to S1206. In the process of S1201, when there is no accessory deviated from the origin position in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), when the process of S1204 is completed, and when the process of S1205 is completed, the initial process of S1206 is executed. The conversion flag 223g is set to on (S1206), and this process ends. When the initialization flag 223g is set to ON, it indicates that the home return operation is in progress.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312 and the variation display setting process of S1313 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1313 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 228 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 228 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 228 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 228 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 228 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 228 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 228 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 228 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 228 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1310 is completed, the accessory control process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to the process of S1312. In the accessory control process (S1311), the operation start and stop of the accessory are set according to the situation of the game. The details of this accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. Then, after the command determination process is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1316), and the power-off process is executed (S1317). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1318), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the accessory control process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this accessory control process (S1311). This accessory control process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the operation of the accessory is started and stopped. This is a process for setting.

In this accessory control process (S1311), first, by determining whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on, it is determined whether or not the power restoration operation of the accessory has been completed (S1401). If it is determined by the processing of S1401 that the initialization flag 223g is on (S1401: Yes), then the initial operation processing for setting the power recovery operation of the accessory is executed (S1402), and this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it is determined whether or not there is an accessory for which operation stop should be set (S1401: No). S1403). The accessory to be stopped is, for example, an accessory that has reached the overhang position by setting the operation, an accessory that has returned to the origin position by setting the return operation from the overhang position, and the like. In the process of S1403, when it is determined that there is an accessory to be stopped (S1403: Yes), the operation stop of the accessory is set, and then the operation stop is set among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i. 0 is set to the bit corresponding to the added character (S1404).

Next, with reference to the load reference value table 222c, the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which operation stop is set is specified, and the specified drive load is specified from the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e. By subtracting the reference value, the total drive load value is updated (S1405), and the process shifts to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that there is no accessory for which the operation stop should be set, the processes of S1404 and S1405 are skipped and the process is shifted to S1406.

In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory for which the operation start should be set (S1406). Specifically, when the operation timing specified in the accessory operation setting table 222e is reached, the corresponding operation group is set to operate. For example, at the start of the opening effect, the group 1 corresponds to the accessory for which the operation start should be set. If it is determined in the process of S1406 that there is no accessory for which the operation start should be set, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that there is an accessory for which the operation start should be set (S1406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation start condition of the group to which the operation start should be set is satisfied. , The operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17A) is used for determination (S1407). Then, when it is determined by the process of S1407 that the operation start condition is not satisfied (S1407: No), the process shifts to S1411.

In the process of S1407, when it is determined that the operation start condition of the accessory for which the operation start should be set is satisfied (S1407: Yes), the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the operation The value obtained by adding the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which the start should be set is stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (S1408).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S1409). Then, when it is determined that the stored value is 100 or less (S1409: No), even if the accessory determined to be started in the process of S1406 is operated, it is supplied to the accessory motor 229. Since it means that the total value of the load currents to be performed falls within the range of the current capacity or less, the accessory operation start is set and the accessory operation start is set among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i. 1 is set in the bit corresponding to (S1410). Then, the value stored in the discriminant value storage area 223j (the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e) and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to set the operation start are added. The value) is stored in the load value storage area 223e to update the total drive load value (S1411), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S1409: Yes), it is determined that the operation start should be set in the processing of S1406. If the operation start is set, it means that a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied to the accessory motor 229. Therefore, in this case, the operation start of the accessory is canceled (S1412), the display alternative effect command for displaying the alternative effect is set (S1413), and the present process is terminated. The display alternative effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display alternative effect command, the display control device 114 starts the alternative effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26 (b)) corresponding to the accessory whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even if the movement of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to execute a display effect that makes the accessory feel as if it has moved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production has the same expectation as when the character moves, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate expectation for each production. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, apart from the load value storage area 223e, a discrimination value storage area 223j for temporarily storing the calculation result for determining whether or not the total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100 is provided. However, the discriminant value storage area 223j may be omitted. In this case, when the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory to be newly operated is once added to the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e and the operation of the accessory is canceled, the operation is performed. The drive load reference value corresponding to the canceled accessory may be subtracted. As a result, the storage area can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the initial operation processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this initial operation process (S1402). This initial operation process (S1402) is executed in the accessory control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for setting the power return operation of the accessory as described above.

In the initial operation process (S1402), first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of the accessory is detected (S1501). When an abnormal operation is detected in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), a notification operation is set according to the accessory that detected the abnormal operation (S1502). The notification operation according to the accessory is, for example, notifying the type of the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred by voice, blinking the LED around the accessory in which the abnormality has occurred, or causing an abnormality. Depending on the type of accessory being played, LEDs of different colors may be turned on. As a result, it is possible to easily make the clerk in the hall recognize which of the accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to have the clerk in the hall take measures according to the character in which the abnormality has occurred.

Next, an error command is set (S1503), and the process shifts to S1504. The error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward 114. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, the display control device 114 starts the error display on the third symbol display device 81 based on the information indicating the error type included in the error command and the type of the accessory during abnormal operation. As a result, the type of error and the accessory in which the error occurs can be easily recognized by the clerk in the hall, so that the clerk in the hall can more easily eliminate the abnormal operation.

On the other hand, if no abnormal operation is detected in the processing of S1501 (S1501: No), the processing of S1502 and S1503 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1504. In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the on-time operation flag 223h is on (S1504), and if it is determined that the on-time operation flag 223h is off (S1504: Yes), the power return operation of the accessory is performed. Since it indicates that it is not the period for executing (that is, the origin of the accessory is being returned), it is then determined whether or not there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505), and the accessory that is returning to the origin is being determined. If it is determined that is present (S1505: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, if it is determined that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S1505: No), either the return to the origin is completed, or all the accessories are in the origin position when the power is turned on, and the origin Either when there is no need to return. That is, in either case, it indicates that all the accessories are in the origin position. Therefore, in this case, first, the number of drive steps of all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S1506), and the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 can be set based on the origin position of each accessory. do. After the processing of S1506 is completed, the operation stop period of 1 second is set (S1507). This operation stop period is a period set as a timing for shutting off the power supply in a shipping inspection or the like. That is, in the shipping inspection or the like, there is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 or the like determines whether or not the sound lamp control device 113 or the like normally starts up based on the power on to the pachinko machine 10 and then shuts off the power supply to move to the next inspection. In such a case, it is conceivable that the accessory is returned to the origin position and then moved to the next inspection, but if the operation stop period is not provided (that is, the origin return operation is completed and the accessory is immediately powered back) (If it is configured so that There is a risk. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the accessory is stopped for a predetermined period (1 second) after the home return is completed. Therefore, by shutting off the power supply during the predetermined period, all the accessories are returned to the origin. The power can be turned off while in position. Therefore, the inspection efficiency can be improved in the shipping inspection and the like.

When the process of S1507 is completed, the turn-on operation flag 223h is set to ON to indicate that it is the execution period of the power recovery operation (S1508), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S1504, when it is determined that the operation flag 223h at the time of closing is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the return to the origin of the accessory has been completed, so that it was set by the processing of S1506. It is determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S1509), and if the operation stop period has not elapsed (S1509: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1509, when it is determined that the operation stop period has elapsed (S1509: Yes), the data is updated by adding 1 to the value of the return pointer 223f (S1510), and the power return operation table 222d (FIG. Of the above (see 18), the data (specified content) corresponding to the value of the reset pointer 223f after the update is read out (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the read data is END information (S1512), and if it is determined that it is not END information (S1512: No), the data read from the power recovery operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is used. Based on this, the drive of the accessory motor 229 is set (S1513), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1512, when it is determined that the data read from the power recovery operation table 222d (see FIG. 18) is END information (S1512: Yes), the initialization flag 223g and the closing operation flag 223h are both turned off. By setting to, it indicates that the power recovery operation has been completed (S1514), and this process ends.

By executing this initial operation process (S1402), it is possible to perform the power return operation of the accessory based on the power on, so whether or not each accessory operates normally in the power return operation. Can be checked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in a state where the accessory in which the operation abnormality has occurred remains.

Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1603). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 ( N1) or the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). Further, in the process of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1608 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is a main control device when a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting prize) and when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from 110, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the processing of S1608 every time the start winning is detected or the special symbol is drawn. It is possible to match the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the start winning prize or the special symbol lottery, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 and Special figure 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203d can be adjusted. When the process of S1608 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1607, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1609). Then, when the opening command is received (S1609: Yes), first, the display opening command is set (S1610). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the operation pattern of the accessory for the opening effect is set (S1611), and the process returns to the main processing. As described above in the description of FIG. 19, in the opening effect, the operation of group 1 is set at the start of the effect. That is, a series of operations are set in which each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is operated to the overhang position (see FIG. 26A) and is operated to the origin position (see FIG. 5). Based on the operation set here, the operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). As described above, as described above, at the timing when the accessory should be started, the group of the accessory to start the operation sets the operation conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). When it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), or when the accessory is newly operated, the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 is the current capacity (rated power). ) Is exceeded (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the start of operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (S1412 in FIG. 40, See S1413).

On the other hand, in the process of S1609, if the opening command is not received (S1609: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main controller 110 (S1612). Then, when the round number command is received (S1612: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1613), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1612: Yes). S1614), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when the round number command has not been received (S1612: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1615). Then, when the ending command is received (S1615: Yes), the display ending command for notifying the display mode of the ending effect is set (S1616), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1615, if the ending command is not received (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1617). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1707 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S1603 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the operation pattern of the accessory corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S1703 is set (S1705). That is, the operation of the accessory is set based on the specified contents of the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 19). Based on the operation set here, the operation start is set in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1410 in FIG. 40). As described above, at the timing when the accessory should be started, it is determined that the group of the accessory to be started does not satisfy the operation conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b (see FIG. 17). In this case (see S1407: No in FIG. 40), it is determined that the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by newly operating the accessory. In that case (see S1409: Yes in FIG. 40), the operation start of the accessory for which the operation pattern is set in the process of S1703 is canceled, and an alternative effect is set (see S1412 and S1413 in FIG. 40).

When the processing of S1705 is completed, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1706). In the process of S1706, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1707.

In the process of S1707, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1707). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1707: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1707: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1708), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1709).

When the processing of S1709 is completed, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1710), and is based on the set stop type. Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1711), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production by using the auxiliary production unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 44. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), a simple command determination process (FIG. 46 (b) S2108) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (a)) and the V interrupt process (FIG. 46 (b) are performed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. )) Is executed.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S2102) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined according to each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 48A. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set to (S2403).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

After the processing of S2403, next, whether the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command is the big hit stop type. (S2404), if it is a jackpot stop type (S2404: Yes), and if it is on, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) is notified of the start of transfer of image data used in the opening effect. The opening data transfer flag 223i is set to ON (S2405), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2404: No), the process of S2505 is skipped, the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By turning on the opening data transfer flag 223i, the image data used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the variable effect that is a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Since the display opening command for instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the display opening command is received. Therefore, when the image data used in the opening effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a large waiting time occurs from the end of the variable effect to the start of the opening effect, and the player operates. There was a risk of anxiety about whether or not it had stopped, and a sense of discomfort.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device is used. It is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that becomes a big hit in 81. As a result, when the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed by the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2208), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2208: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (a). FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In this opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2503). S2504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2505), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2504, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81 (for 5 rounds). ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed. As a result, when the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2210: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2210), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2212: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined number of rounds display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer 233d Is set to (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2703). S2704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2212, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2801). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S2802 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 228 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2214, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2216), and there is an error command. If (S2216: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2902), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the error type is an operation error of the accessory, information indicating which accessory has an error and a warning image indicating the content of the error occurring in the accessory are displayed. ..

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2216 (S2216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2218), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2218 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 48 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), this process is completed, and the display is performed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3206). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 52 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image when the power is turned on ends, one of the variation images when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502), and if it is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509).

If the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 47), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It means that it is determined that it is a jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the variable effect that becomes a big hit is completed. That is, if the opening data transfer flag is on (S3509: Yes), after the opening data transfer flag is set to off (S3510), the image data used in the opening effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data used in the opening effect is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired. Then (S3512), the process proceeds to S3517.

In the process of S3509, if the opening data transfer flag is not on but off (S3509: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3514), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The discrimination in the processing of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3517, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3518, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (S2104), and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending) Information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) are used to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to have a plurality of production accessories that can be changed by driving the accessory motor 229, and the plurality of accessories are played. By changing it according to the situation of, it is possible to realize various interesting effects. Each of the accessory motors 229 for driving these accessories is configured to operate based on the load current supplied from the power supply device 115.

A unique current capacity (rated power) is set in the power supply device 115 (7A / 1750W in this embodiment), and the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is the current capacity (rated power). ) Is exceeded, there is a risk that problems such as the pachinko machine 10 shutting down and the voice lamp control device 113 stopping operation may occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a load reference value table 222c is provided in order to keep the load current value (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 below the current capacity (rated power or less). A value (drive load reference value) corresponding to the load current consumed when each accessory is changed is specified. Then, when it is attempted to newly change the accessory, a load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is supplied by newly varying the accessory based on this drive load reference value. If it is determined that the accessory is to be driven, the drive of the accessory is canceled. As a result, the accessory can be changed within the range of the current capacity or less (rated power or less), so that the pachinko machine 10 may operate abnormally when a load current exceeding the current capacity is supplied. It is possible to prevent the product from breaking down.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the accessory is canceled, the alternative effect corresponding to the accessory is executed. This alternative effect is equivalent to the effect of changing the accessory even if the operation of the accessory is canceled by displaying the display effect of the same system as the effect of changing the accessory on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player have the expectation of. In addition, if you are trying to perform a complex effect of a character and a display image, simply canceling the operation of the character and leaving the display content as the content of the compound effect is an unnatural display effect. There is a risk of becoming. For example, in the opening effect (see FIG. 26A), if the operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 to the overhanging position is simply canceled, the movement to the overhanging position is canceled, and the third symbol display device 81 is centered. Only the characters "Congratulations" are displayed, and nothing is displayed around the characters, resulting in an unnatural display. On the other hand, by preparing the above-mentioned alternative effect that is completed only by the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the effect of unnatural display contents. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the production.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to classify the accessory into a plurality of groups and set the operation in each group. In addition, the accessories that make up each group are the accessories that are in a positional relationship that does not interfere with each other. When the accessory is changed, it is configured to be changed when the operation start condition determined for each group is satisfied. Specifically, the operation start condition is a condition in which the presence or absence of interference with other groups is determined, and the operation is performed at a timing at which interference with other groups does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accessories of different groups from interfering with each other, and to prevent the accessories from being damaged by the impact of the collision between the accessories. In addition, since the movement of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, the operation of the accessory and the content of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are deviated from each other, giving the player a sense of discomfort. It can be suppressed that it ends up. If the operation start condition of the group is not satisfied, the operation start of the accessory is canceled and the above-mentioned alternative effect is controlled to be executed. As a result, even if the movement of the character is canceled, the player can have the same degree of expectation as the effect of changing the character. In addition, by preparing an alternative effect, it is possible to prevent the display content from becoming unnatural, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect. can.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operating conditions are set for each group instead of setting the operating conditions for each accessory, so that the design can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the designer who sets the operation of the accessory at the time of designing. In addition, it is sufficient to prepare a table for setting the operating conditions for each group, and it is not necessary to prepare a data table for setting the operating conditions for each accessory, so that the number of data tables is reduced. be able to. Therefore, the price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the storage area.

In the present embodiment, the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold value, and when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the operation start of the accessory is canceled, but the present embodiment is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a drive load reference value corresponding to 90% of the current capacity (rated power) is set as a threshold value, and the start of operation of the accessory is canceled based on whether or not the total load current (power consumption) exceeds the threshold value. It may be configured to determine whether or not. By providing a 10% margin with respect to the current capacity (rated power), the configuration included a accessory having a load current (power consumption) higher than the average due to individual variation of the accessory motor 229. Even so, it is possible to reliably operate the accessory within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that a load current (electric power) exceeding a predetermined threshold value (7A / 1750W) is supplied, the operation start of the accessory to be newly operated is canceled. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 may be set to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power) by stopping the operation of a part of the accessory during operation. Further, by reducing the rotation speed of the accessory motor 229 instead of stopping the operation of the accessory, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 is reduced, and the current capacity (rated power) is reduced. ) May be within the range.

If it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), the operation start and operation stop of each accessory should be switched at high speed, and the timing of operation should be shifted from each other. Therefore, the load current (power consumption) may be set to be less than or equal to the current capacity (less than or equal to the rated power). For example, when all the accessories in group 1 and all the accessories in groups 3 to 5 are moved at the same time (that is, the total drive load reference value is 110, and it is determined that the current capacity is exceeded. In this case, first, only the accessories constituting the group 1 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second), and then the operation is stopped. Then, the operation of the accessories constituting the group 1 is stopped, and the accessories constituting the groups 3 to 5 are operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and then stopped. After that, the group 1 and the groups 3 to 5 are alternately operated for 0.1 seconds each. As a result, the load current (power consumption) corresponding to the drive load reference value 60 can be set during the operation period of group 1, and the load corresponding to the drive load reference value 50 can be set during the operation period of groups 3 to 5. It can be electric power (power consumption). Therefore, the load current (electric power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 can be set to the current capacity (rated power) or less while operating all the accessories to be operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from having a problem due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

In the present embodiment, when the opening effect or various variable effects are executed, the accessory to be operated is determined in advance according to the type of the effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the accessory to be operated is not limited to this. May be decided by lottery. For example, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the main control device 110 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113. In 113, a lottery for whether or not to operate each accessory may be executed, and the operation of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery may be set. The accessory set here is determined as an accessory to be started in the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) (see S1406 in FIG. 40), satisfies the operation conditions for each group (S1407: Yes), and is satisfied. Moreover, when the load current is equal to or less than the current capacity (S1409: No), the operation start is set (S1410).

Further, in the lottery for whether or not to operate the accessory, the operation probability may be changed according to the fluctuation pattern type (variation time), the lottery result of the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the type of the accessory, and the like. .. Specifically, for example, in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot, the accessory may be configured to be easier to operate than in the deviation pattern, and in the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, it is better than the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the accessory can be easily operated. As a result, the more the characters move, the higher the expectation for the jackpot can be raised, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the priority order for operating the accessory is set, and when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, the load current (power consumption) equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power). The operation may be canceled in order from the accessory having the lowest priority (the accessory having the higher priority is operated as much as possible) until the result becomes. In addition, the priority order for operating the accessory may be different depending on the conditions (type of effect, type of variation pattern, lottery result of special symbol, etc.).

In this modification, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not to cancel the operation start of the accessory is determined. It does, but it doesn't have to be. For example, in the case of a model in which there are few types of accessories and the load current (power consumption) is less than the current capacity (rated power) even if all the accessories that can be changed at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) When a sufficiently large power supply device 115 is used, it is possible to omit the determination of the load current (power consumption). As a result, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e of the RAM 223, and the discrimination value storage area 223j can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 65. In the first embodiment described above, when the accessory is to be newly changed so that the load current exceeding the current capacity is not supplied by the power supply device 115, the accessory in operation and the accessory are newly added. It was configured to calculate a value corresponding to the total load current when all the accessories to be operated were operated. Then, based on the calculated value, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, and if it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the accessory to be newly operated is used. It was configured to cancel the start of operation. As a result, the load current (electric power) supplied to the accessory motor 229 is configured to be equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the operation start of the accessory is not canceled but the third symbol display device 81 is illuminated. By suppressing the brightness (brightness) of the LCD backlight 230, the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is suppressed. With this configuration, each accessory can be operated without limitation of the current capacity, so that the degree of freedom in the operation of the accessory can be increased.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the backlight 230 for LCD is added (the backlight 230 for LCD is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113). The point made possible) is that the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed in the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, some processes included in the start-up process (see FIG. 37) and the main process (see FIG. 39) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 58, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. An LCD backlight 230 for illuminating the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the back side is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment. The LCD backlight 230 is composed of an LED light source. Further, the RAM 223 included in the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a backlight flag 223k and a brightness reduction flag 223l in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 from a darker state than during the normal game to the normal brightness is being executed. More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the LCD backlight 230 is turned on based on the power-on, the brightness is set to be darker than during the normal game until the power return operation of the accessory is completed. It is configured. As a result, even if the operation of the accessory due to the power return operation and the operation of the accessory based on another trigger (for example, the start of a jackpot) must be performed at the same time, the LCD backlight 230 is used in advance. Since the load current (power consumption) that can be consumed by the accessory motor 229 can be increased by the amount that the load current (power consumption) consumed by the power supply device 115 is reduced, the load supplied from the power supply device 115 The current (power) can be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power restoration operation is completed, a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, which has been set to a dark brightness, to the normal brightness is performed. The backlight flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is the execution period of the brightness return processing.

When the backlight flag 223k is on, it indicates that it is the execution period of the brightness return processing, and when it is off, it indicates that it is outside the execution period of the return processing. Further, the backlight flag 223k is set to on when the power recovery operation is completed (see S1522 in FIG. 63), and is set to off when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 returns to the normal brightness (see S1522 in FIG. 63). See S3805 in FIG. 65).

The brightness reduction flag 223l makes the LCD backlight 230 darker based on the determination that the total load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 exceeds the current capacity (rated power). This is a flag indicating that the status has been set. When the brightness reduction flag 230 is on, it indicates that the backlight 230 for LCD is in a dark state, and when it is off, it indicates that the brightness is normal. This brightness reduction flag 223l is set to on when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is darkened in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) described later (see S1427 in FIG. 62), and returns to the normal brightness. If so, it is set to off (see S3706 in FIG. 64).

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the transition of the LED current when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is changed will be described by taking as an example when the power is turned on. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a timed change of the LED current flowing through the LEDs constituting the LCD backlight 230. FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show examples in which the brightness is varied by different dimming methods, and either dimming method can be adopted.

Here, conventionally, there are fewer types of accessories compared to recent gaming machines, and even if the accessories are operated freely, a load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. It never happened. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories mounted on gaming machines have been increasing, and the load current (electric power) consumed by operating the accessories has also been increasing. Therefore, when a plurality of accessories are operated at the same time, a load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) may be consumed. In such a case, as a result of exceeding the specifications of the power supply device, the control device that controls the accessory may shut down, the power of the gaming machine itself may be turned off, or an operation abnormality of the accessory may occur. There was a risk that a problem such as a shutdown would occur.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the load current (electric power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed by newly operating the accessory, FIG. 59 (a). ) Or the dimming method illustrated in FIG. 59 (b) is used to dim the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. That is, by reducing the load current (power consumption) consumed in the LCD backlight 230, the total amount supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while securing the load current (power consumption) for newly operating the accessory. The load current (power consumption) is configured to be less than or equal to the current capacity (less than or equal to the rated power). Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the accessory operation is abnormal. Can be suppressed from occurring.

First, FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example (current dimming method) in which the LCD backlight 230 is dimmed by varying the absolute value of the LED current. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), since the power cannot be supplied to the LED from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the control of the LCD backlight 230 becomes possible, the current cannot be supplied to the LED. The LED current is in the off state (the state where the current is 0). After that, when the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled, a current value (IL) lower than the current value (IH) set during the normal game is set as the LED current value for the LCD backlight 230. NS. By setting a lower current value than usual, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the LED can be reduced, so that the load current (power consumption) that can be supplied to the accessory motor 229 is increased. be able to. Further, by setting a current value lower than usual, the brightness of the backlight 230 for LCD becomes darker than usual.

The state of dimming the brightness to reduce the load current (power consumption) continues until the power recovery operation of the accessory is completed. This is because the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to be a large value because a plurality of accessories operate in the power return operation. That is, if the operating conditions other than the power recovery operation are satisfied, the accessory may operate in a complex manner and the load current (power consumption) may exceed the current capacity (rated power). By reducing the load current (power consumption) of the light 230, it is possible to prevent the total load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power consumption).

In this embodiment, the brightness at the time of turning on the power is set to be 80% of the brightness during the normal game (that is, the current value IL is set to a value of 80% of the current value IH). There is). This value of 80% is a value set so that the total value of the load current (power consumption) is surely lower than the current capacity (rated power) even if each accessory operates in combination. Therefore, it can be changed according to the number of accessories of the pachinko machine 10 (the number of accessory motors 229). For example, in a model with a small number of accessories, even if a plurality of accessories operate in combination, the load current consumed is small, so the amount of reduction in the load current (power consumption) in the LCD backlight 230 should be reduced. Can be done. Therefore, the current value IL can be set high. On the contrary, in a model having a large number of accessories, the current capacity may be exceeded unless a larger load current (power consumption) is reduced in the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, in this case, the current value IL may be set to a lower value so that the current capacity (rated power) is surely lower than the current capacity (rated power).

When the power return operation of the accessory is completed, the current value is gradually increased over a predetermined period so that the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 becomes the normal brightness. Specifically, by increasing the current value by 1% every second, the brightness during the normal game is set over 20 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in brightness. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from being significantly changed due to a large change in the brightness in a short period of time, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

After returning to the normal brightness, the normal brightness is maintained until the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off unless it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed. Then, after the power supply is cut off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. Then, after the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the next power is turned on.

FIG. 59B is a diagram showing an example in which the LCD backlight 230 is dimmed by setting the LED current value as a fixed value and varying the ratio between the on-period and the off-period of the LED current. Hereinafter, the dimming method shown in FIG. 59 (b) is referred to as a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) dimming method.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the power is turned on and the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled, the IH is set as the LED current and the LED is set to be turned on and off repeatedly. .. The LED is turned on and off repeatedly at a constant frequency (for example, 320 Hz). Further, in one cycle composed of one set of on period and off period, the length of the on period is set to be 80% of one cycle, and the length of the off period is set to be 20% of one cycle. ..

Here, the setting of the on period and the off period means to output a lighting control command including data indicating the length of the on period and data indicating the frequency to a known LED driver. This LED driver is configured to be able to switch between the on period and the off period of the LCD backlight 230 based on the received lighting control command. For example, when a lighting control command indicating an on period of 80% and a frequency of 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED operation includes an 80% on period of one cycle (1/320 second) and one cycle. The 20% off period is repeatedly set by the LED driver. This operation continues until a new lighting control command is received.

A method of specifying the on period by a lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The above-mentioned data indicating the length of the on period (lighting rate data) is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means that the lighting rate is 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal notation), it means that the lighting rate is 100%. Further, as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH, the lighting rate is set to increase at equal intervals. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting rate is 50% (that is, 128/255).

The reference signal (synchronous signal), which is the reference of the LED lighting frequency, can be generated by the LED driver itself (set to free run) at the frequency specified by the lighting control command, or is input from the outside of the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can also be used. Further, whether to use the free run or the external synchronization signal can be specified by the lighting control command, and when the external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

In addition, the position of the ON period can be changed by the lighting control command in one cycle of turning the LED on and off. That is, the LED on period can be set at the same time as the synchronization signal is detected, and the LED off period can be set after the end of the on period. For example, the LED off period can be set at the same time as the synchronization signal is detected and turned off. You can also set the on period after the period ends.

A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of this on-period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the on period is specified by, for example, 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to specify from which section the on period is started by 8-bit data. For example, if the data that specifies the position of the on period is 00H, the on period is started from the first section of the 255 equal divisions of one cycle (that is, at the same time as the start of one cycle). If the data that specifies the position of the on period is 1 EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the on period is started from the 31st section of the 255 equal divisions of one cycle.

As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LED of the present embodiment is configured to be able to accept a lighting control command including a plurality of data. Although not shown, the lighting control command is defined in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in association with the setting timing. For example, as a lighting control command to be set when the power is turned on, it is specified that the on period is 80%, the lighting frequency is 320 Hz, and the start position of the on period is the first section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts. The data is specified.

The LED driver is not limited to the one that accepts the lighting control command of the above-described embodiment. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the on period with a simpler lighting control command may be adopted. For example, an LED driver that can accept a lighting control command associated with the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal parts may be used for each bit of 8-bit data. Specifically, in order from the lower bits, the sections corresponding to the earlier bits in time are associated, the section corresponding to the bit with data 1 is set to the lighting state, and the section corresponding to the bit with 0 data is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), the first three sections of each section obtained by dividing one cycle into eight equal parts are turned on, and the latter five sections are turned off. As a result, the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 59 (b). The frequency at which the LED is turned on and off (lighting frequency) is a frequency (for example, 320 Hz) sufficiently high so that the on period and the off period cannot be visually distinguished. Therefore, the brightness felt by the player is the brightness obtained by averaging (integrating) the 80% on period and the 20% off period (that is, the normal 80% brightness). This state in which the ON period is 80% continues until the power return operation of the accessory is completed. Then, when the power return operation of the accessory is completed, the length of the on period is gradually increased over a predetermined period. Specifically, the length of the on period is increased by 1% each time 1 second elapses, and the on period is controlled to reach 100% after 20 seconds. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in brightness, as in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 from being significantly changed due to a large change in the brightness in a short period of time, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

After the LED is turned on for 100% and returns to normal brightness, until it is determined that the load current (power) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) is consumed, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Normal brightness continues to be maintained. Then, after the power supply is cut off, the LED current cannot be supplied to the LCD backlight 230, so that the LED current is turned off. Then, after the power is turned off, the LED current is turned off until the next power is turned on.

In the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), it is only necessary to be able to switch between the LED current on state (current value IH state) and the off state, so that the LED driver is relatively simple. A circuit having a configuration can be adopted. That is, since a relatively inexpensive driver can be adopted, the price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59 (a)), it is necessary to adopt an LED driver that can set the LED current value to a plurality of values, but more when the brightness is reduced by the same ratio. There is an advantage that the power consumption of the LED can be reduced. This is because the power consumption of the LED is proportional to both the LED current value and the anode voltage. That is, since it is necessary to lower the anode voltage in order to make the LED current value 80%, the power consumption is 80% during the normal game due to the decrease in the LED current (20%) and the decrease in the anode voltage. Is less than. On the other hand, in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), when the LED current is on, the current value is always IH and the anode voltage does not change. Therefore, the power reduction rate with respect to the power during the normal game is simple. Is proportional to the lighting rate. Therefore, the electric power is 80% of the electric power during the normal game, and the current dimming method has a larger decrease in the electric power with respect to the electric power during the normal game. Therefore, by adopting the current dimming method, it is possible to save energy in the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 65, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. This start-up process is a process that is started when the power is turned on, similar to the start-up process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

In each of the start-up processes S1101 to S1112, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1112 of the start-up process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the start-up process (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, when the initial setting of the RAM 203 is executed by the process of S1111, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% of the brightness during the normal game. (S1121). Here, as a method for setting the brightness to 80%, a current dimming method (see FIG. 59 (a)) may be adopted, or a PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)) may be adopted. .. Further, a method different from these (for example, a method in which PWM dimming is performed after reducing the LED current value to some extent) may be used.

By reducing the load current (power consumption) in advance by reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, the total load current (power consumption) is total even if a large number of accessories are operated in the power recovery operation. Can be suppressed from exceeding the current capacity (rated power consumption). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from having a problem due to exceeding the current capacity (rated power). When the processing of S1121 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S1112), and the processing shifts to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described.

Of the main processes (see FIG. 61), in each of the processes S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318, the same processes as those of the main processes S1301 to S1310 and S1312 to S1318 in the first embodiment are executed, respectively. Will be done. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the accessory control process 2 for setting the operation start and operation stop of each accessory is executed (S1321). .. Next, after the power return operation of the accessory is completed, the backlight control process, which is a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the brightness during the normal game, is executed (S1322), and the process is transferred to S1312. And migrate. Details of these accessory control processes 2 (S1321) and backlight control process (S1322) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64 and 65, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the accessory control process 2 (S1321) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this accessory control process (S1321). This accessory control process 2 (S1321) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and as described above, the operation of each accessory is started. And it is a process to set the operation stop.

In each of the accessory control processes 2 (S1321), S1401, S1403, S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413, S1401 and S1403 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S1406, S1407, S1409, S1412, and S1413.

Then, in the accessory control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1401 that the initialization flag 223 g is on (S1401: Yes), the accessory control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40). ), The initial operation process 2 is executed (S1421) instead of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). This initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory, similarly to the initial operation process (see FIG. 41). Details of this initial operation process 2 (S1421) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is an accessory for which operation stop should be set, the accessory operation is a process for setting the operation stop of the accessory. The stop process is executed (S1422). The details of this accessory operation stop processing (S1422) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

Further, in the accessory control process 2 of the present embodiment, after the process of S1409 is completed, the drive load corresponding to the accessory that starts operation is added to the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e. Then, the value is updated as a new total drive load value (S1423). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value (total drive load value) is greater than 100 (S1424), and if it is determined that it is 100 or less (S1424: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the total drive load value is larger than 100 (S1424: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S1425). If it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1425 (S1425: Yes), the power return operation of the accessory is incomplete (that is, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 has already been set. Since it means that the state is set to 80%), this process is terminated as it is. In the process of S1425, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1425: No), the load is set by setting the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to 80% of the normal game. The current (power consumption) is reduced (S1426), the brightness reduction flag 223l is set to ON (S1427), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

In the accessory control process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 40), the load value storage area 223e was not updated when it was determined that the total of the drive load reference values exceeded 100, but this embodiment In the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62), the load value storage area 223e is updated (that is, regardless of whether or not the total of the drive load reference values exceeds 100) when there is a new accessory to be operated. , A value larger than 100 is also stored as the total drive load value) (see S1423). This is because the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to always operate the accessory even if the total drive load value exceeds 100. As described above, when the total drive load value exceeds 100, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced by dimming the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured to always operate within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing or malfunctioning due to the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

Next, the initial operation process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 2 (S1421). This initial operation process 2 (S1421) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and is an initial operation process (see FIG. 62) in the first embodiment. 40), this is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory.

In each of the initial operation processes 2 (S1421), S1501 to S1514, the same processes as those of S1501 to S1514 of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment are executed.

Then, in the initial operation process 2 (S1421) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1512 that the data read from the power recovery operation table 222d is END information (S1512: Yes), the LCD backlight 230 The brightness of the above is set to be increased by 1% (S1521). That is, the LCD backlight 230, which is set to have a brightness of 80% of the brightness during a normal game when the power is turned on, is controlled to have a brightness of 81%. Specifically, in the case of the current dimming method (see FIG. 59A), the LED current value flowing through the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1%. Further, in the case of the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), the on period is increased by 1%, and 81% of one cycle composed of one set of on period and off period is on period. And set so that 19% is the off period.

When the setting of the LCD backlight 230 is completed by the process of S1521, the backlight flag 223k is set to ON (S1522), and the process shifts to S1514. By turning on the backlight flag 223k in the process of S1522, the power return operation of the accessory is completed, and it is shown that it is the execution period of the process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the normal brightness. .. Therefore, thereafter, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is controlled to be increased by 1% each time 1 second elapses. It should be noted that controlling the brightness to gradually increase over a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) makes it difficult for the player to notice the change in the brightness and makes it difficult for the player to notice. This is to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from giving a sense of discomfort. That is, if the brightness is momentarily set to the brightness during the normal game (that is, if the brightness is increased by 20%) at the end of the power recovery operation, the game is based on a sudden change in the brightness. This is intended to prevent a person from having a feeling of strangeness in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the accessory operation stop processing (S1422) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this accessory operation stop process (S1422). This accessory operation stop process (S1422) is a process executed in the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and as described above, the operating combination This is a process for stopping the operation of an object.

In this accessory operation stop process (S1422), first, in the process of S1403 of the accessory control process 2 (see FIG. 62), the operation stop of the accessory determined to be stopped is set, and the accessory operation is set. Among the flags 223i, 0 is set in the bit corresponding to the accessory for which the operation stop is set (S3701). Next, the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which the operation stop is set by the processing of S3701 is subtracted from the total drive load value stored in the load reference value table 222c, and the subtracted value is the new total drive load. The load reference value table 222c is overwritten as a value (S3702).

When the process of S3702 is completed, the process of returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the brightness during the normal game (S3703 to S3706) is then executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on (S3703). In the process of S3703, if the initialization flag 223 g is turned on (S3703), it means that the power return operation of the accessory has not been completed, and the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is set to 80% during the normal game. Since it is not necessary to change it as it is, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223g is off (S3703: No), then whether or not the brightness reduction flag 223l is on (that is, when the accessory stopped this time is started to operate, the LCD back is used. Whether or not the brightness of the light 230 has been reduced to 80%) is determined (S3704), and if the brightness reduction flag 223l is off (S3704: No), it means that the brightness is during normal gaming. Since it is not necessary to perform the process of returning the brightness, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the luminance reduction flag 223l is on (S3704: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the total drive load value updated in the process of S3702 is 100 or less (S3705). ). Then, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the total drive load value is larger than 100 (S3705), when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is returned to the brightness during the normal game, the load current (power consumption) However, since there is a risk that the current capacity (rated power) may be exceeded, this process is terminated as it is without changing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 from 80%.

On the other hand, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the total drive load value after the update is 100 or less (S3705: Yes), even if the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is returned to the brightness during the normal game, the current Since there is no possibility of exceeding the capacity (rated power), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is set to the brightness during normal gaming (S3706), and this process is terminated.

Next, the backlight control process (S1322) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this backlight control process (S1322). This backlight control process (S1322) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and as described above, the power return operation of the accessory is performed. This is a process for returning the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the brightness during a normal game after the completion.

In this backlight control process (S1322), first, it is determined whether or not the backlight flag 223k is on (S3801), and if it is determined that it is off (S3801: No), the power return operation of the accessory is performed. Since it means that it is not the execution period of the brightness return processing based on the end of, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3801 when it is determined that the backlight flag 223k is on (S3801: Yes), then whether or not 1 second has passed since the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 was last changed. (S3802), and if it is determined that one second has not elapsed (S3802: No), it is not the timing to increase the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3802, when it is determined that 1 second has passed since the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 was last changed (S3802: Yes), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is increased by 1% (S3802: Yes). S3803). Next, it is determined whether or not the increased brightness is 100% (that is, the brightness during the normal game) (S3804), and if the brightness does not reach 100% (S3804: No), the brightness is continued thereafter. This process is terminated as it is in order to continue the process of gradually increasing. Further, in the process of S3804, when it is determined that the brightness becomes 100% (the brightness during the normal game) (S3804: Yes), the backlight flag 223k is set to off (S3805), and this End the process.

By performing this backlight control process (see FIG. 65), the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is gradually increased (1% per second) after the power restoration operation of the accessory is completed, for 20 seconds. It is possible to return to the brightness during normal game by applying. By changing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 stepwise in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in brightness. Therefore, by making the player recognize the change in the brightness, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by newly operating the accessory, or when the power of the accessory is restored based on the power-on. By reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 during the operation execution period, the load current (power consumption) consumed by the entire pachinko machine 10 is configured to be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). There is. As a result, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the accessory operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, even if the total drive load value exceeds 100, the operation of the accessory is not canceled, so that it is not necessary to prepare an alternative effect. Therefore, the storage capacity for storing the alternative effect can be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to gradually increase the brightness to return to the brightness during the normal game when the power return operation of the accessory is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the power return operation of the accessory is completed, the brightness is gradually increased when it is determined that the total drive load value exceeds 100 and the reduced brightness is returned to the brightness during the normal game. May be good. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the brightness, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the change in the brightness.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to immediately increase the brightness during the normal game only when it is determined that the total drive load value exceeds 100 and the reduced brightness is returned to the brightness during the normal game. However, even when the power return operation of the accessory is completed, the brightness may be immediately increased to the brightness during the normal game. As a result, the period during which the brightness is dark can be shortened, so that the appearance quality of the third symbol display device can be improved. Further, in the case of immediately increasing the brightness during the normal game, the black image of the full screen may be displayed as an image at the timing of changing the brightness. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the change in the brightness of the backlight 230 for the LCD. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by recognizing the change in the brightness. be able to. For the same reason as in the case of increasing the brightness, the black image of the full screen may be displayed even at the timing of reducing the brightness. If the liquid crystal display used in the third symbol display device 81 is of a method in which the transmittance is the minimum (that is, a black image) when there is no applied voltage to the liquid crystal, the player notices the change in brightness. In addition to the effect of making it less likely to occur, the power consumption of the driver that drives the liquid crystal can also be reduced.

As the liquid crystal display, a method that maximizes the transmittance (that is, a white image) when there is no voltage applied to the liquid crystal may be adopted. In this case, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, a white image is displayed in order to reduce the power of the driver that drives the liquid crystal and secure a margin for the current capacity (rated power). It may be configured.

In this embodiment, all the accessories that are determined to be operated are configured to operate, but the control and drive that reduce the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to reduce the load current (power consumption). A control for canceling the start of operation may coexist for all or a part of the accessory to be made to operate. In addition, control may be prioritized. For example, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the brightness is first reduced to a predetermined value (for example, 90% during normal gaming), and the current capacity (rated power) is reduced even when the brightness is reduced. If it is determined that the amount exceeds the limit, the operation of the accessory to be driven may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from becoming too dark in appearance.

In the present embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced when the power is turned on and when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power) by driving the accessory. It was configured to reduce the load current (power consumption), but it is not limited to these. For example, the LCD backlight 230 may be configured to be controllable in the display control device 114, and the brightness of the backlight may be adjusted according to the type of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, in an image having a low APL (Average Picture Level, average image level) (an image having a large number of relatively low-gradation pixels), the load current (power consumption) is reduced by reducing the brightness. It may be configured as. By reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 in an image having a low APL, the brightness of black can be reduced, so that an image having a good contrast feeling (an image in which black is tightened) can be obtained. In addition, energy saving of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved. Further, for example, when a black image on the entire screen is detected as an image, the LCD backlight 230 may be turned off. This is because it is useless to keep the LCD backlight 230 on even though the image is not displayed. This makes it possible to save energy in the pachinko machine 10.

If there is room to increase the gain of the image according to the histogram of the image, the gain of the image may be increased instead of significantly reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230. Specifically, for example, when the histogram of the image is determined and it is determined that the image is composed of only pixels having a pixel level of 50% or less, the gain of the image is increased to double the pixel level of all pixels. By reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230, the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced without changing the apparent brightness. As a result, the load current (power consumption) can be further reduced and the apparent brightness can be secured as compared with the case where the LCD backlight 230 is simply darkened according to the image.

In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is reduced, the entire third symbol display device 81 is controlled to be dark, but the third symbol display device 81 is defined to have a plurality of areas. The LCD backlight 230 that illuminates each area may be provided so that the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 can be controlled for each area. Then, when the accessory shields a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 due to the operation of the accessory, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the shielded portion in the third symbol display device 81, The LCD backlight 230 that illuminates an area that is difficult to see may be turned off. For example, when the standing accessory 410 or the central swinging accessory 820 operates to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81, which is the overhanging position, the LCD backlight 230 that illuminates the central area of the screen is turned off. It may be configured to allow. As a result, the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity (rated power) can be set without dimming the brightness of the portion visible to the player.

Further, when controlling the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 for each area, the brightness of the entire screen is reduced by the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59B), and the LED current off period is reduced for each area. It may be configured to be staggered. That is, it may be configured so that the on-period of one region and the off-period of a region other than that region coincide with each other. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the current (electric power) of the LCD backlight 230 from momentarily increasing at the timing when the on periods of the entire region overlap. Therefore, it is possible to suppress not only the average value of the load current (power consumption) but also the instantaneous value exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

In the present embodiment, in the PWM dimming method (see FIG. 59 (b)), the dimming frequency is set to 320 Hz, but the dimming frequency is not limited to this, and the LCD backlight 230 is turned on and off. If the frequency is difficult to recognize the period (that is, flicker does not occur), the frequency may be higher than 320 Hz (for example, 400 Hz) or lower than 320 Hz (for example, 200 Hz).

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded during the normal game, and if the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the brightness is lowered to reduce the load current (power consumption). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be predetermined according to the effect, and the LCD backlight 230 may be operated according to the operation pattern. For example, in the off-road super reach and the shared super reach, the brightness is set to be darkened after 8 seconds and 15 seconds, which are the operation timings of the accessory, to reduce the load current (power consumption). You may. As a result, the load current (power consumption) can be set within the range of the current capacity (rated power). In this case, the brightness is gradually lowered from before the operation timing of the accessory (for example, when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the effect), and the operation timing of the accessory (8 seconds and 15 seconds after the start of the effect). The brightness may be set to be the darkest (for example, 80% brightness). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the brightness, and it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the change in the brightness from feeling uncomfortable with the production.

Further, only the operation pattern of the LCD backlight 230 may be defined in advance, and the accessory to be operated at each operation timing may be selected by lottery. For example, when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 29) in the main control device 110 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control device In 113, each accessory is operated at the operation timing of the accessory determined for each fluctuation pattern (for example, in the case of special reach, 8 seconds, 15 seconds, and 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production). It may be configured to execute the lottery of whether or not, and set the operation of the accessory determined to be operated by the lottery. On the other hand, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 may be reduced according to the operation timing of the accessory provided for each effect. As a method of reducing the brightness of the backlight 230 for LCD, for example, a method of reducing the brightness by gradually reducing the brightness from a few seconds before the operation timing of the accessory, or a full screen as an image at the operation timing of the accessory. A method of displaying the black image of the LCD and reducing the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 to the target brightness at once can be mentioned. As a result, it is possible to realize the operation effect of a wide variety of accessories while keeping the total load current (power consumption) supplied to the pachinko machine 10 within the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

In the present embodiment, when the brightness of the backlight is reduced, it is configured to be 80% of the brightness during the normal game, but the load current (power consumption) exceeding the current capacity (rated power) It may be configured so that the brightness to be set is variable according to the value. For example, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by 30% or more (that is, the total drive load value is 130 or more), the brightness is set to 80% of the normal game, and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is set. When it is 20% to 30% (that is, when the total drive load value is in the range of 120 to 130), the brightness is 85% and the excess of the current capacity (rated power) is 10% to 20%. In some cases (ie, if the total drive load is in the range 110-120), the brightness is 90% and the excess current capacity (rated power) is less than 10% (ie, drive load). If the total value is less than 110), the brightness may be 95%. As a result, the reduction in brightness can be suppressed to the minimum, so that it is difficult for the player to notice that the apparent brightness of the third symbol display device 81 has decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 78. In the first embodiment described above, the pachinko machine includes only the accessory that operates between the retracted position (origin position) and the overhang position, and the accessory that rotates or swings from the origin position. 10 has been described.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the configuration includes an accessory capable of performing the opening / closing operation and the lighting operation in a complex manner. That is, the configuration includes an accessory for the effect having a member that opens and closes and a light source provided inside the member that opens and closes. It becomes visible. In this way, by including the accessory that can perform the complex operation in the configuration, the effect of the effect of the accessory can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 provided in the game board 13 for production is the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the voice lamp control device 113, the configuration of the RAM 223 has been changed, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 37), and the main process (see FIG. 39). The included partial treatment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. As shown in FIG. 66, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the second entry port 640 is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the first entry port 64. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

Next, the operation unit 300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 300. As shown in FIG. 67, the operation unit 300 has a box-shaped back case 310 whose one side is open from the bottom wall portion 311 and the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311. Be prepared. The back case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 66) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The operation unit 300 is provided with four hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 that perform an opening / closing operation and a lighting operation in a complex manner in the internal space of the rear case 310. As shown in FIG. 67, the hemispherical accessory 910 is provided at the upper right of the front view with respect to the opening 311a, and the hemispherical accessory 920 is provided at the upper left of the front view with respect to the opening 311a. Further, the hemispherical accessory 930 is provided at the lower right side of the front view with respect to the opening 311a, and the hemispherical accessory 940 is provided at the lower left side of the front view with respect to the opening 311a.

In addition, the composite operation unit 1000 is housed in the internal space of the rear case 310. The composite operation unit 1000 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 312 of the back case 310, and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 312 while being in contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 312. It is arranged on the wall portion 311. In the assembled state (see FIG. 67), the composite operation unit 1000 has a rectangular opening formed at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 when viewed from the front.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 1000 will be described. FIG. 68 is a front view of the operating unit 300. Note that FIG. 68 shows a state in which a pair of half-moon-shaped accessories 1060 of the combined operation unit 1000 are arranged at overhanging positions.

At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 67, the pair of half-moon shaped members 1060 of the composite operation unit 1000 are retracted above and below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (FIG. 66). reference). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 68, the pair of half-moon-shaped accessories 1060 are slid and moved in the directions facing each other, and the pair of half-moon-shaped accessories 1060 are moved to the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, the third symbol). It is arranged in front of the display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Each of these hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, 940, and the composite operation unit 1000 are formed so as to be able to operate independently, and are arranged in a stacked state as described above. Therefore, for each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940, and the composite operating unit 1000 in which the layers are arranged differently, the operating member is inside the opening 311a of the rear case 310. It can be operated at the same time even if it is in the form of overhanging. That is, not only can each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 and the combined operation unit 1000 be operated individually, but these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the composite operation unit 1000, the retracted position (origin position) and the overhanging position of the pair of slide members 1020 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 1020.

Next, the combined operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. 69 (a) and 69 (b) are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 1000. In addition, in FIG. 69A, the slide member 1020 and the half-moon type accessory 1060 are arranged in the retracted position, and in FIG. 69B, the slide member 1020 and the half-moon type accessory 1060 are arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated. The overhanging positions of the slide member 1020 and the half-moon shaped accessory 1060 are formed as terminals located on the opposite side of the above-mentioned retracted position among the ends of the movable range of the slide member 1020.

As shown in FIG. 69, the pair of slide members 1020 of the composite operation unit 1000 are slid in the vertical direction, and in the process of the sliding movement, the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is rotated by 180 degrees. That is, the pair of half-moon-shaped accessories 1060 are stationary at the retracted position (see FIG. 69 (a)) with their semicircular arc sides facing the other half-moon-shaped accessories 1060. Then, in the process of being slid and moved in the vertical direction by the slide member 1020, it rotates about a rotation axis in a direction orthogonal to the plane including the game board 13, and has a semicircular shape with respect to the other half-moon-shaped accessory 1060. Rotate until the straight part (string part) of is facing. At the overhanging position (see FIG. 69 (b)), the straight portions (string portions) of the pair of upper and lower half-moon-shaped accessories are in contact with each other, so that the pair of semi-circular accessories 1060 are combined. It forms a circular shape. Further, when the semicircular accessory 1060 operates to the overhanging position, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 normally stored inside the half-moon accessory 1060 is exposed to the outside of the half-moon accessory 1060. Operate. The claw-shaped accessory 1063 is provided in each of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060, and is arranged at equal intervals in the arc portion of the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060.

Next, the structures of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. Since each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 has the same structure, the explanation will be given here by taking the hemispherical accessory 910 as an example, and the other hemispherical accessories 920, 930, The description of 940 will be omitted.

FIG. 70A is a front perspective view when the hemispherical accessory 910 is taken out from the operation unit 300. The hemispherical accessory 910 includes a light source 231 for the accessory inside, and a light emitting portion 911 capable of emitting light by turning on or off the light source 231 for the accessory, and a pair of upper and lower opening / closing portions capable of opening / closing operation. A plurality of gears 913a, 913b, 913c, 913d, 913e for transmitting the power of the accessory motor 229 to the 912a, 912b and the opening / closing portions 912a, 912b are provided.

The state of FIG. 70A shows a state in which the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum extent, respectively, and the opening / closing portion 912a is driven by driving the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispherical accessory 910. Can be changed downward and the opening / closing portion 912b can be changed downward to bring the closed state. When the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are closed, the light emitting portion 911 is invisible to the player (see FIG. 67).

FIG. 70B is a side view of the hemispherical accessory 910. The gears 913a and 913b are fixed (adhered) to the opening / closing portion 912b and the opening / closing portion 912a, respectively, and the opening / closing portions 912b and 912a perform opening / closing operations in conjunction with the rotation amounts of the gears 913a and 913b, respectively. It is configured as follows. Further, the opening / closing portion 912b is provided with a light-shielding plate 916. Although the details will be described later, the light-shielding plate 916 is used to determine the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing portion 912b. Since the light-shielding plate 916 is fixed to the opening / closing portion 912b, it operates in conjunction with the operation of the opening / closing portion 912b.

A light-shielding sensor 915 is provided behind the gear 913a. The light-shielding sensor 915 is a sensor for determining whether or not the position of the opening / closing portion 912b is on the closed state side (lower side than the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). Details will be described later, but based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing portion 912b is on the closed state side (lower side than the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). In this case, when the light emitting unit 911 is turned off and it is determined that the light emitting unit 911 is on the open state side (above the specific position) from the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)), the light emitting unit 911 is turned on. It is configured in. When the shading by the shading plate 916 is detected by the shading sensor 915, it is determined that the opening / closing portion 912b is on the closed state side (lower side than the specific position) than the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). ..

Here, like the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 mounted on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory (composite operation accessory) that operates the opening / closing unit and the light emitting unit in a complex manner. Has existed for some time. Further, as a method of controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the combined operation accessory, there is a control of turning off the light based on whether or not the opening / closing portion is completely closed. However, in this conventional control, if the opening / closing part is opened even a little, the light emitting part remains lit. Therefore, in the state where the opening / closing part is slightly open immediately before closing, the gap between the opening / closing parts is open. The light from the light emitting part was leaking from. That is, there is a problem that the appearance quality of the compound operation accessory is poor. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the light-shielding sensor 915 detects that the opening / closing portion 912b has reached a specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) (that is, before the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed). Since the light emitting portion can be turned off, it is possible to prevent light leakage when there is a slight gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, and the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, We are trying to improve the appearance of the 940.

FIG. 70 (c) is a front view of the hemispherical accessory 910. As shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum extent, the entire light emitting portion 911 can be visually recognized from the front side.

Next, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b of the hemispherical accessory 910 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened to the maximum extent, and FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are opened by about half. FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing the case where the opening / closing portion 912b is at the above-mentioned specific position (detection start position of the light-shielding sensor 915), and FIG. 71 (d) is a diagram showing the case where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed. It is a figure which shows the state which was done.

As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b always operate so that their positions are symmetrical in the vertical direction. Further, the operation of the opening / closing members 912a and 912b is performed in the positive direction (opening direction) or the negative direction (closing direction) with respect to the accessory motor 229 with the specific position as the reference position (position where the number of steps is 0). The number of steps is set. Specifically, in order to operate (open) from the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) to the position shown in FIG. 71 (a), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction by 25 steps (25 degrees). .. On the other hand, in order to operate (close) from the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) to the position shown in FIG. 71 (d), it is necessary to operate the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by 5 steps (5 degrees). That is, when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are changed from the completely closed state to the completely opened state, the accessory motor 229, which is in the state of being advanced by 5 steps in the negative direction, is moved in the positive direction. The operation may be performed 30 steps so that the number of steps is 25 steps in the forward direction. Further, in the case of changing the state from the completely open state to the completely closed state, the accessory motor 229, which is in the state of being advanced by 25 steps in the positive direction, is operated by 30 steps in the negative direction. The number of steps may be set to 5 steps in the negative direction. In this way, by managing the operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b by the number of steps starting from the origin position, the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b can be arranged in a desired manner.

As the opening / closing portion 912b of the accessory motor 229 operates toward the closed state side (upper side), the light-shielding plate 916 operates downward (see FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b)). The operation of the shading plate 916 will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-shielding sensor 915 and the light-shielding plate 916. 72 (a) to 72 (d) show the states of the light-shielding sensor 915 and the light-shielding plate 916 when the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state of FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d), respectively. It is a figure.

The light-shielding sensor 915 is provided with a light-shielding detection unit 915a (see FIG. 72 (a)), and determines whether or not the light-shielding plate 916 overlaps the light-shielding detection unit 915a (whether or not it blocks) to block light. It is configured to change the output of the sensor 916 (set it to the H output state). In the states of FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the light-shielding detection unit 915a and the light-shielding plate 916 do not overlap, so that the light-shielding sensor 916 is in the L output state. Then, when the arrangement shown in FIG. 72 (c) (that is, the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), a part of the light-shielding detection unit 915a is blocked by the light-shielding plate 916. The shading sensor 915 is set to the H output state. The position where the light-shielding sensor 915 starts detection is set as the origin position of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b. Further, this origin position is a return position when the origin return operation is executed based on the power is turned on, but when the operation of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b is completed during the normal game, the origin position is exceeded and the position is closed. It becomes a state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

Even if the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed by operating from the origin position to the closed state side, the light-shielding detection unit 915a continues to be blocked by the light-shielding plate 916 (see FIG. 72 (d)). ). That is, while the hemispherical accessory 910 is in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (d), the output of the light-shielding sensor 916 is always in the H state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the arrangement of the light-shielding sensor 916 and the light-shielding plate 915 and the output of the light-shielding sensor 916 will be described in association with each other. The upper side of FIG. 73 shows the positional relationship between the light-shielding sensor 916 and the light-shielding plate 915, and the lower side of FIG. 73 shows the output of the light-shielding sensor 915 in each positional relationship.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the state where the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely opened (see FIG. 71A), the output of the light shielding sensor 916 is in the L state. Then, when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are changed to the closed state side and the light-shielding plate 916 blocks a part of the light-shielding detection unit 915a (see FIG. 71 (c)), the output of the light-shielding sensor 916. Stands up in the state of H. The state in which the output is H does not change even if the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during a normal game, the light emitting unit 911 is turned off while the output of the shading sensor 915 is in the H state, and light is emitted when the output of the shading sensor 915 is in the L state. The unit 911 is turned on. That is, when the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b that were in the open state (see FIG. 71 (a)) are closed, the light emitting unit is reached at a specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) before it is completely closed. The 911 can be turned off.

Assuming that the light emitting unit 911 is continuously lit until the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, in the state immediately before closing (a state in which a slight gap is formed between the opening / closing portion 912a and the opening / closing portion 912b). However, since the light emitting unit 911 is in a lit state, light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, resulting in poor appearance.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four hemispherical accessories are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each accessory is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such circumstances, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing portion is closed first only for a part of the hemispherical accessories among the four hemispherical accessories. In this case, the hemispherical accessory whose closing is slower than the others is in a state where light leaks from a small gap created before the opening / closing part is closed, so that the other hemispherical parts in which the opening / closing part is closed There is a risk that light leakage will be noticeable due to the comparison with the accessory.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light-shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting portion 911 is set to move toward the closed state side from the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). It is configured to turn off. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking through the gaps between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, so that the appearance quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

Further, even if a plurality of operation patterns of the hemispherical accessory 910 are provided by determining only the output state of the light-shielding sensor 915 and setting the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit 911, the opening / closing unit 912b can be used. When a specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)) is reached, the light emitting unit 911 can be mechanically turned off. That is, it is not necessary to specify the lighting timing and the extinguishing timing of the light emitting unit 911 for each of the plurality of operation patterns. Therefore, by defining the lighting data and the extinguishing data for each operation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to the accessory light source 231 which is the light source of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. Further, the contents of various tables defined in ROM 222 included in the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from the load reference value table 222b in the first embodiment. That is, the content has been changed to match the character of the present embodiment. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with a lighting flag 223m in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The lit flag 223m is a flag indicating the state of the accessory light source 231 corresponding to each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940. This flag is composed of 1 byte, and each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 is associated with each bit. Specifically, the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are associated in order from the lower bits.

Each bit of the lit flag 223m indicates that the corresponding accessory is lit when the value is 1, and indicates that the corresponding accessory is lit when the value is 0. The value of the free bits (upper 4 bits) is fixed at 0. For example, if the lighting flag 223m is 03H (00000011B in binary notation), it means that the hemispherical accessory 910 and the hemispherical accessory 920 are lit, and the other accessories are off. .. Based on the state of each bit of the lighting flag 223m, the hemispherical accessory being lit can be specified.

Next, the operation start condition table 222b and the load reference value table 222c provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation start condition table 222b in the present embodiment. The operation start condition table 222b is a table in which the operation start conditions of the accessory are defined for each group as in the operation start condition table 222b in the first embodiment, and satisfies the conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b. Only in the case of, the operation start of the corresponding accessory can be set.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the accessories in the present embodiment are classified into three groups. Specifically, the four hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are classified into group 1, the plurality of claw-shaped accessories 1063 are classified into group 2, and the half-moon-shaped accessories 1060 are classified into group 3. ing. Since group 1 does not interfere with other groups, no operation start condition is specified. Further, the group 2 is defined so that the operation can be started only when the operation of the group 3 is stopped. Further, the group 3 is defined so that the group 2 can be started to operate only at the origin position (the state in which the group 2 is housed in the half-moon type accessory 1060).

Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, by starting the operation of the accessory according to the conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b, each accessory is changed without interfering (contacting) with each other. be able to.

FIG. 75B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the load reference value table 222c in the present embodiment. The load reference value table 222c is a load current (power consumption) consumed by the accessory motor 229 corresponding to each accessory when each accessory is operated in the same manner as the load reference value table 222c in the first embodiment. This is a data table that defines the values corresponding to (drive load reference value). By operating the accessory in the range where the total of the drive load reference values is 100 or less based on the load reference value table 222c, the accessory can be operated in the range of the current capacity (rated power) or less.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the drive load reference value when opening and closing any of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 is 10. That is, the drive load reference value when the four hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are opened and closed at the same time is 40. Further, the drive load reference value when any one of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 is turned on is 10. That is, assuming that all four hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are in the lit state, it corresponds to the drive load reference value 40. As a result, the drive load reference value when operating the accessory of Group 1 becomes 80 at the maximum.

Further, the drive load reference value for operating the claw-shaped accessory 1063 constituting the group 2 is 15, and the drive load reference value for operating the half-moon type accessory 1060 of the group 3 is 15, respectively. That is, the drive load reference value when the upper and lower half-moon type accessories 1060 are rotated at the same time is 30. Then, the drive load reference values when the half-moon type accessory 1060 is slid from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhanging position or slid from the overhanging position to the retracted position (origin position) are respectively. It is 15. That is, the drive load reference value when the upper and lower half-moon type accessories 1060 are slid at the same time is 30. Therefore, the drive load reference value when operating the accessory of the group 3 is 60 at the maximum.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, based on the drive load reference value defined in the load reference value table 222c (see FIG. 75 (b)), the variable accessory and the newly variable accessory Control is performed so that the total load current (power consumption) of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the object is equal to or less than the current capacity (rated power or less). As a result, the accessory motor 229 can always be driven within the range of the load current (power consumption) of the current capacity or less (rated power or less), so that the load current (power consumption) determines the current capacity (rated power). It is possible to suppress the excess. Therefore, when the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, the voice lamp control device 113 that controls the accessory motor 229 shuts down, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or the accessory operation is abnormal. Can be suppressed from occurring.

Next, the power supply recovery operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. Similar to the power restoration operation table 222d in the first embodiment, the power restoration operation table 222d executes a restoration operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. It is a data table that is referred to at the time.

As shown in FIG. 76, the power supply return operation table 222d (see FIG. 76) of the present embodiment is configured so that the return operation is executed in the order of group 1 → group 2 → group 3 according to the update of the return pointer 223f. Has been done. Further, in the return operation of the present embodiment, as the power return operation of the four hemispherical accessories constituting the group 1, the opening / closing part is opened to the maximum extent, and then the closing operation is performed until it is completely closed. It is configured as follows. That is, the return operation is executed beyond the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)). This is because, as the origin position of the opening / closing portion, the boundary position (see FIG. 71 (c)) at which the output of the light-shielding sensor switches from the L state to the H state is set as the origin position. By setting the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) to the origin position, the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the shading sensor. Therefore, in the origin return operation executed before the power return operation is performed using the power return operation table 222d, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are set to the same degree of opening. Can be done. Therefore, since the power return operation can be executed starting from the same state, the exact same power return operation may be executed for all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, as the power supply recovery operation table 222d, only a single data table shown in FIG. 76 needs to be prepared, and it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns according to the start position, so that the amount of data can be reduced.

Further, when the origin position is the state in which the opening / closing portion is completely closed, whether or not the opening / closing portion is completely closed cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment. , 93, 940 may end the home return before it is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven by several steps after it is completely closed. If the origin return process is completed before the power return operation is completely closed, the operation start position of the power return operation may vary, and the power return operation may not be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, resulting in damage to the opening / closing portion, the gear, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the shading sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be set to exactly the same position. Further, by excessively closing the opening / closing portion, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion and the gear from being damaged.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, by executing the power return operation of the accessory based on the power return operation table 222d, the entire operating range in which the accessory may operate during the normal game. Can be operated comprehensively. As a result, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the opening / closing operation of any of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940, the sound, the LED, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. In addition to notifying the abnormality by means of, etc., it is configured to notify that the abnormality has occurred by blinking the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. By blinking the accessory itself in which the abnormality has occurred, the clerk in the hall can more easily recognize the part where the abnormality has occurred. Further, since the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory performs either a lighting operation or an extinguishing operation during the normal game, some abnormality occurs by executing a blinking operation that is not performed during the normal game. It is possible to recognize that it is being done more easily. The operation mode of the light emitting unit when an abnormality occurs is not limited to the blinking operation. For example, it may be configured to be lit with a brighter brightness than when it is lit during a normal game, or conversely, it may be lit with a darker brightness. Further, the location where the abnormality has occurred may be visually notified by continuously changing the brightness of the light emitting portion corresponding to the hemispherical accessory in which the abnormality has occurred. Also with these, the clerk in the hall can more easily recognize the part where the abnormality has occurred.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the origin return process 2 (S1131) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The origin return process 2 (S1131) is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the start-up process (see FIG. 37), and is executed instead of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. It is a process.

Of the origin return process 2 (S1131), in the process of S1206, the same process as the process of S1206 of the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the origin return process 2 (S1131) of the present embodiment, when the process is started, first, the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor detecting the H (on) output (that is, FIG. 71). The opening / closing portion located on the closed state side of the arrangement (c) is set to open until the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) is reached (S1211).

If the opening operation is performed in the H (on) output state, the origin position cannot be detected. This is because the light-shielding sensor is in the H (on) output state even at the origin position. Therefore, in the process of S1211, when the light-shielding sensor reaches the L (off) output state after executing the opening operation until the light-shielding sensor reaches the L (off) output state (that is, until the light-shielding sensor passes the origin position). The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is stopped, and the accessory motor 229 is driven in the direction of the closing operation by one step. As a result, even if the light-shielding sensor executes the home-return operation from the H (on) output state, the open / close portion can be returned to the home position.

When the processing of S1211 is completed, the hemispherical accessory opening / closing portion (that is, the opening / closing portion corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that is detecting the L (off) output) is located on the open state side of the arrangement of FIG. 71 (c). The opening / closing portion) is set to perform the closing operation until it reaches the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) (S1211). That is, the opening / closing portion is closed until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) for the first time.

Next, it is determined whether or not all the accessories (plurality of claw-shaped accessories 1063) constituting the group 2 are at the origin position (S1213), and if there is an accessory that deviates from the origin position (S1213: No). ), The accessory constituting the group 2 is set to return to the origin position (S1214), and the process shifts to S1215. On the other hand, in the processing of S1213, when it is determined that all the accessories constituting the group 2 are at the origin position (S1213: Yes), the processing of S1214 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1215.

In the process of S1215, it is determined whether or not all the accessories constituting the group 3 are at the origin position (S1215), and if there is an accessory deviated from the origin position (S1215: Yes), another group. The group 3 is set to start the home return after the home return of the accessory is completed (S1216), and the process shifts to S1206. If there is no accessory that deviates from the origin position in group 3 (S1215: No), the process of S1216 is skipped and the process shifts to S1206.

By executing the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77), each accessory can be set to the origin position in the same manner as the origin return process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Therefore, at the start of the power supply return operation executed after the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) is completed, each accessory can always be in the same arrangement. Therefore, since the same operation may be set each time as the setting of the power restoration operation, the specified contents of the power restoration operation table 222d can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this main process.

Of the main processes (see FIG. 78), in each of the processes S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318, the same processes as those of the main processes S1301 to S1310 and S1311 to S1318 in the first embodiment are executed, respectively. Will be done. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the accessory lighting for setting the lighting operation and the extinguishing operation of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 is completed. The control process is executed (S1331). Next, the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process (S1332), which is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940, is executed (S1332), and the process shifts to S1311.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the accessory lighting control process (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. This accessory lighting control process (S1331) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and as described above, in order to set the lighting operation and the extinguishing operation of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, 940. It is the processing of.

In the accessory lighting control process (S1331), first, it is determined whether or not the lighting flag 223m has an on bit (S3901), and if it is determined that there is no on bit (S3901: No), all of them. Since the light emitting portion of the hemispherical accessory is being turned off and there is no accessory for newly setting the extinguishing, each process (S3902 to S3907) for setting the extinguishing is skipped and the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, in the process of S3901 when it is determined that there is an on bit (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the shading sensor corresponding to the on bit is H (on) (S3902). When it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S3902: No), it means that the opening / closing portion is on the open state side from the position where the opening / closing portion should be turned off (see FIG. 71 (c)). Since it is not necessary to set the light off, the process shifts to S3908.

In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on) (S3902: Yes), then, among the bits of the lighting flag 223 m, the H (on) state is set as the output of the light-shielding sensor. 0 is set in the bit corresponding to the detected hemispherical accessory (S3903).

When the processing of S3903 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the on-time operation flag 223h is off in order to determine whether or not the home return operation is in progress (S3904). , S3905). Then, when it is determined that the home return operation is in progress (S3905: Yes, S3906: Yes), the drive of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the accessory including the light-shielding sensor that detects the H (on) output state is included in the configuration. By stopping, the opening / closing part is stopped (S3906), and the process shifts to S3908.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is off in the processing of S3904 (S3904: No), the light emitting portion of the accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that detects the H (on) state in the processing of S3902. The extinguishing is set (S3907), and the process shifts to S3908. Further, in the process of S3905, when it is determined that the on-time operation flag 223h is off (S3906: No), the home-origin return operation has already ended and the power return operation is in progress (that is, the light-shielding sensor of this time). On detection does not mean that the position has returned to the origin position due to the return to the origin), so the process shifts to S3908.

In the process of S3908, the hemispherical accessory lighting process for setting the lighting of the hemispherical accessory is executed (S3908), and this process is terminated. Details of this hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

By executing the accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79) in this way, each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 is at the stage where the opening / closing portion is at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c). It can be turned off. Here, assuming that the light emitting unit 911 is continuously lit until the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, there is a slight gap between the opening / closing portion 912a and the opening / closing portion 912b immediately before closing. Even in the state), since the light emitting unit 911 is in the lit state, the light leaks from the slight gap between the opening / closing part 912a and the opening / closing part 912b, and the appearance quality deteriorates. It ends up.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four hemispherical accessories are provided, but the period and the number of steps until each accessory is closed due to individual variation or the like are not always the same. Under such circumstances, a situation may occur in which the opening / closing portion is closed first only for a part of the hemispherical accessories among the four hemispherical accessories. In this case, the hemispherical accessory whose closing is slower than the others is in a state where light leaks from a small gap created before the opening / closing part is closed, so that the other hemispherical parts in which the opening / closing part is closed There is a risk that light leakage will be noticeable due to the comparison with the accessory.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the light off at the stage of the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c), it is possible to prevent the light from leaking from the gap between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b. .. Thereby, the appearance quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

Further, by executing the above-mentioned accessory lighting control process (see FIG. 79), the opening / closing portion of each accessory can be stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)) in the origin return operation. The origin position is not the state where the opening / closing part is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)), but the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor is the origin position, because the origin position is the detection result of the light-shielding sensor. This is because it can be accurately determined based on the above. That is, the opening and closing portions of all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power return operation can be executed starting from the same state, the exact same power return operation may be executed for all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns for the power recovery operation, the amount of data in the power recovery operation table 222d can be reduced.

Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment whether or not it is completely closed, so that each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is completely closed at the origin return. In some cases, the return to origin may be completed before the motor is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven by several steps after the motor is completely closed. If the origin return process is completed before the power return operation is completely closed, the operation start position of the power return operation may vary, and the power return operation may not be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, resulting in damage to the opening / closing portion, the gear, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the shading sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be set to exactly the same position. Further, by excessively closing the opening / closing portion, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion and the gear from being damaged.

Next, the hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) executed in the above-mentioned accessory lighting control process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. This hemispherical accessory lighting process (S3908) is a process for setting the lighting of the hemispherical accessory.

In the hemispherical accessory lighting process, first, it is determined whether or not the lighting flag 223m has an off bit (S4001), and if it is determined that there is no off bit (S4001: No), all hemispheres are used. Since the accessory 910, 920, 930, and 940 are lit, which means that there is no new accessory to be lit, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that there is an off bit (S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the output of the light-shielding sensor corresponding to the off bit is L (off) (S4002). When it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on) (S4002: No), the opening / closing portion of the accessory corresponding to the off bit is closer to the closed state than the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c). (That is, it is arranged in the extinguished state), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4002, when it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S4002: Yes), then, among the bits of the lighting flag 223m, the light-shielding sensor that detects off is configured. 1 is set for the bit corresponding to the hemispherical accessory to be included (S4003).

When the processing of S4003 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the initialization flag 223g is on and the closing operation flag 223h is off in order to determine whether or not the home return operation is in progress (S4005, S4006). Then, when it is determined that the home return operation is in progress (S4005: Yes, S4006: Yes), the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the hemispherical accessory including the light-shielding sensor that detects the L (off) output is included. By stopping the drive, the opening / closing portion is set to stop, and then the accessory motor 229 is closed by one step (S4007), and then this process is terminated. As a result, even when the light-shielding sensor detects H (on) when the power is turned on (the degree of opening is less than or equal to the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the home-returning operation is shown in FIG. 71 (c). You can revert to placement. That is, regardless of the arrangement of the opening / closing portions when the power is turned on, the opening / closing portions of all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, 940 can be returned to the origin position (see FIG. 71 (c)).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is off in the processing of S4004 (S4004: No), the light emitting portion of the accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that detects the L (off) state in the processing of S4002. Lighting is set (S4007), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S4005, when it is determined that the on-time operation flag 223h is off (S4006: No), the home-origin return operation has already ended and the power return operation is in progress (that is, the light-shielding sensor of this time). On detection does not mean that the position has returned to the origin position by returning to the origin), so this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, since the detection start position of the shading sensor is set to the origin position in the origin return, the start position of the power return operation can be set to exactly the same position. Further, when the completely closed position is set to the origin position, it is necessary to close the opening / closing part by further driving the accessory motor 229 in 5 steps after the light-shielding sensor detects the H output state. be. However, the position driven in 5 steps is not always completely closed due to individual variations in the opening / closing portion, individual variations in the accessory motor 229, variations in the installation position of the light-shielding sensor, and the like. In addition, considering the individual variation of the accessory, the number of steps from the light-shielding sensor to the H output state to the closed state is provided for each pachinko machine 10 (furthermore, one pachinko machine 10 is provided. It is not realistic to set each of the four hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 individually), and the same number of steps is set for all the pachinko machines 10. There is a need to. Therefore, each time the origin is returned, each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 is operated until the opening / closing portion is completely closed (the same number of steps is set for the accessory motor 229). Depending on the individual, the number of steps may be too large. For example, the opening / closing portion may be closed at the stage where the opening / closing portion is operated in the negative direction from the origin position in four steps, and the upper / lower opening / closing portions may be pushed into each other at the fifth step. That is, when returning to the origin, the upper and lower opening / closing portions are pushed into each other, so that the opening / closing portion may be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the position where the light-shielding sensor is in the H output state (see FIG. 71 (c)), it is possible to suppress further pushing after the opening / closing portion is completely closed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being damaged when returning to the origin.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the hemispherical accessory opening / closing process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. This hemispherical accessory opening / closing process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), and is a process for setting the opening / closing of each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940.

In this hemispherical accessory opening / closing process (S1332), first, it is determined whether or not there is a light-shielding sensor in the H (on) state (S4101), and if there is no light-shielding sensor in the H (on) state (S4132). S4101: No), the process shifts to S4104. On the other hand, when there is a light-shielding sensor in the H (on) state (S4101), it is determined whether or not the number of times the on state is detected is the fifth (S4102). That is, it is determined whether or not H (ON) is detected continuously over 5 main processes (see FIG. 78), and the case where H (ON) is momentarily turned on due to the influence of noise or the like is excluded. There is.

In the process of S4102, if the detection of the H (on) state is less than 5 times (S4102: No), the process shifts to S4104. On the other hand, in the processing of S4102, when the H (on) state is detected five times in a row (S4102: Yes), then the hemispherical accessory corresponding to the light-shielding sensor that detects the H (on) state is used. The number of operation steps until the operation is stopped is set for the accessory motor 229 for operation (S4103). This number of steps is the number of steps from when the light-shielding sensor detects the on to when the opening / closing portion is completely closed.

In the process of S4104, it is determined whether or not there is a light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state (S4104), and if there is no light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state (S4104: No), the present process is terminated as it is. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the light-shielding sensor in the L (off) state exists, it is determined whether or not the L state (off) is detected five times in succession (S4105), and it is not the fifth detection of the L (off) state. In the case (S4105: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the detection of the L (off) state this time is the fifth time, the opening / closing part is fully opened as the number of operation steps of the accessory motor 229 for driving the hemispherical accessory set to be lit (FIG. 71). The number of steps until the result (see (a)) is set (S4106), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a hemispherical accessory capable of performing the opening / closing operation and the lighting operation in a complex manner. Further, in order to control the lighting and extinguishing of the hemispherical accessory, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the opening / closing portion is closed by a certain amount or more based on the detection result of the shading sensor. It is configured to control lighting and extinguishing based on the detection result of the shading sensor. That is, the light-shielding sensor detects light-shielding, turns off the light-emitting part while the output is in the H (on) state, and turns on the light-emitting part while the output is in the L (off) state. It is configured in. That is, the light emitting portion can be turned off before the opening / closing portion is completely closed.

Assuming that the light emitting unit 911 is continuously lit until the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are completely closed, in the state immediately before closing (a state in which a slight gap is formed between the opening / closing portion 912a and the opening / closing portion 912b). However, since the light emitting unit 911 is in a lit state, light leaks from a slight gap between the opening / closing unit 912a and the opening / closing unit 912b, resulting in poor appearance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the positions of the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b are determined based on the output of the light-shielding sensor 915, and the light emitting portion 911 is set to move toward the closed state side from the specific position (see FIG. 71 (c)). It is configured to turn off. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking through the gaps between the opening / closing portions 912a and 912b, so that the appearance quality of the hemispherical accessory 910 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor (the position where the L output state is switched to the H output state) is set at the origin position of the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory. This is because the origin position can be accurately determined based on the detection result of the shading sensor. That is, the opening and closing portions of all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 can have the same degree of opening. Therefore, since the power return operation can be executed starting from the same state, the exact same power return operation may be executed for all the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 each time. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of patterns for the power return operation, so that the amount of data can be reduced.

Further, when the completely closed state is set as the origin position, it cannot be detected by the light-shielding sensor of the present embodiment whether or not it is completely closed, so that each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is completely closed at the origin return. In some cases, the return to origin may be completed before the motor is completely closed, or the accessory motor 229 may be further driven by several steps after the motor is completely closed. If the origin return process is completed before the power return operation is completely closed, the operation start position of the power return operation may vary, and the power return operation may not be executed accurately. Further, if the accessory motor 229 is driven even after it is completely closed, the upper and lower opening / closing portions may come into contact with each other and be pushed into each other, resulting in damage to the opening / closing portion, the gear, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the origin position is set to the detection start position of the shading sensor, the start position of the power return operation can be set to exactly the same position. Further, by excessively closing the opening / closing portion, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion and the gear from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, when each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 93, 940 is opened from the closed state to a certain level or higher (see FIG. 71 (c)), the corresponding accessory is turned on. It was configured to turn off the corresponding accessory when it was closed above a certain level from the open state (see FIG. 71 (c)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the accessory is turned on, it may be configured to be turned on at the same time when the opening operation of the accessory is started. Further, instead of setting the light emitting unit to either turn on or off, the light emitting unit may be turned on even in the closed state and set to a darker brightness than the brightness in the open state. ..

In the present embodiment, the state of the light emitting unit is switched based on the detection result of the light blocking sensor, but the switching is not limited to the brightness of the light emitting unit. For example, instead of the light emitting unit, a display means capable of displaying display information such as an image is mounted on the hemispherical accessory, and the image displayed on the display means is switched based on the detection result of the shading sensor. May be good. In this case, a transparent or translucent member may be used as the opening / closing portion so that the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized by the player even while the opening / closing portion is closed. .. Further, as a specific example of the image displayed on the display means, for example, a human figure is displayed while the light-shielding sensor is in the H (on) output state (that is, the opening / closing part is completely closed or slightly opened). Even if it is configured to display the image of a person while the shading sensor is in the L (off) output state (that is, the opening / closing part is opened from the position shown in FIG. 71 (c)). good. Further, the image of the person to be displayed and the image of the person to be displayed may be configured so that different images can be selected depending on the mode of the effect and the result of the effect (whether or not it is a big hit). As a result, while the character is displayed, the player can be made to be interested in which person is displayed and play the game. Further, when the shading sensor outputs L (off) and an image of a person is displayed, the content and result of the effect can be predicted according to the type of the person. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the production using the hemispherical accessory can be further increased, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, an opening / closing portion having a structure in which the upper and lower members operate symmetrically is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sliding door-shaped opening / closing part that opens / closes the left and right members, a door-type opening / closing part that opens / closes at the back or front, a shutter-type opening / closing part that opens / closes from one direction, or the like may be adopted.

In the present embodiment, in the origin return operation, the position is always returned to a specific position (the position shown in FIG. 71 (c)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off), the closing operation is performed so as to return to a specific position, and when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on), the opening / closing part is stopped without operating. You can leave it as it is. During a normal game, the opening and closing parts of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are completely closed for most of the period, so that the opening operation is performed from the closed state to a specific position when the power is turned on. The possibility is high. That is, the period required for returning to the origin tends to be long. On the other hand, if the home position return is not performed when the output of the shading sensor is in the H (ON) state, the time required for the home position return can be shortened. In the power recovery operation performed thereafter, first, the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 may be opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the L (off) state. .. Then, the opening operation and the closing operation may be executed starting from the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the L (off) state. As a result, the operation after the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the L (off) state can be made common.

In the present embodiment, the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H state from the state in which the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. 71 (c). The position of the shading sensor is set as described above, but the position is not limited to this. For example, in the open state and the closed state, the light-shielding sensor is in the L output state and is in the process of transitioning from the closed state to the open state (in the process of transitioning from the open state to the closed state). The light-shielding sensor may be configured to be in the H output state at the position of. Further, the origin position may be the edge on the open state side or the edge on the closed state side among the detection positions of the light-shielding sensor. Further, for example, when the edge on the open state side is set to the origin position, as the origin return, if the light-shielding sensor is in the H state when the power is turned on, the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L. You just have to move it to the side. Then, when the output of the light-shielding sensor detects L, the process may be returned by one step in the closed state (negative direction). On the other hand, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is L when the power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether the origin position is on the open state side or the closed state side. Operate in one step, and if the output of the sensor does not change, operate in two steps toward the closed state side (negative direction). Then, if the output of the sensor does not change, the steps may be incremented by 1 and operated alternately in the positive direction and the negative direction until the light-shielding sensor detects the state of the H output. This makes it possible to search for the origin position while increasing the amplitude step by step in the positive and negative directions, so that if the origin position is moved in the opposite direction to the origin position, it will be excessively opened or closed. It can be suppressed. Further, when the light-shielding sensor detects H by operating in the forward direction, it means that the edge on the opposite side of the origin position has been reached. Therefore, the accessory motor 229 is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L. You just have to move it to the side. Then, when the output of the light-shielding sensor detects L, the process may be returned by one step in the closed state (negative direction). On the contrary, if the output of the sensor is switched to H while operating in the negative direction in the home return, it means that the position is the home position, so the home return when the shading sensor detects H. You just have to finish. In this way, even when the light-shielding sensor is in the intermediate position between the closed state and the open state, the opening / closing part is returned to the origin position without excessively opening or excessively closing the opening / closing part. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being damaged due to excessive operation.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one or a plurality of accessories that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and operating conditions are set for each group. That is, when changing the accessory that constitutes one group, it operates only when the conditions that do not interfere with other groups are satisfied based on the operation conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be configurable. In addition, each group is composed of accessories that operate all at once (execute the operation effect of the same system) at the operation timing such as the start of the effect.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the characters that do not have the possibility of interfering with all other characters are grouped (Group 1), and the characters that may interfere with each other by changing the character are grouped. Are grouped (Group 2). Then, the operating conditions for each accessory constituting the group 2 are defined, and the accessory is configured to operate according to the operating conditions. As a result, the accessories that make up Group 1 can be changed (freely) without restrictions, except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, the degree of freedom of movement of the accessories constituting the group 1 can be increased. In addition, it is possible to prevent problems such as damage to the accessory due to interference between the accessories.

The modification of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration, in the voice lamp control device 113, the operation start condition table 222b and the load reference value table specified in the ROM 222. The point that the contents of 222c are changed, the point that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is provided in the RAM 223, and the partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 39) are the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The difference is. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the first embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, an operation start condition table 222b, a load reference value table 222c, and a power supply recovery operation table 222d provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the first embodiment, And the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, the load reference value table 222c will be described first, and then the operation start condition table 222b and the accessory operation setting table 222e will be described.

Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the load reference value table 222c is a data table that defines the drive load reference value when each accessory is changed for each accessory. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the drive load reference value when each accessory is changed is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in this modified example, two types of groups, group 1 and group 2, are provided, and the accessory constituting each group is the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It has been changed from. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in Group 1, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840, a rotating accessory 520, a left swinging accessory 710, and a right swinging accessory 710. It is composed of 730 and a central rocking accessory 720. Regarding the central rocking accessory 720, only the swinging motion belongs to the group 1, and the descending motion belongs to the group 2. All of the accessories constituting Group 1 are accessories that do not have a possibility of interfering with other accessories regardless of the arrangement of the other accessories. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an interference condition for the accessory constituting the group 1, and in principle, the accessory can be freely operated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the accessories constituting the group 2 are the tilting accessory 510, the standing accessory 410, and the central swinging accessory 720. As described above, since all of these accessories move to the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 by being variable, one of the accessories constituting the group 2 is operating or is in the overhanging position. In this case, if other accessories constituting Group 2 are operated, there is a risk that these accessories will come into contact with each other (collision). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation start condition is set for the group 2. The operation start conditions for this group 2 are specified in the operation start condition table 222b.

Next, the operation start condition table 222b in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). The operation start condition table 222b is a data table that defines the operation start conditions when each accessory is started to operate, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the operation start condition table 222b of the present embodiment, only the operation start conditions of each accessory (tilting accessory 510, standing accessory 410, and central swinging accessory 720) constituting the group 2 are specified. Group 1 is not specified. This is because, as described above, the accessories constituting the group 1 do not interfere with other accessories even if they are operated, and it is not necessary to set the operation start condition.

The operation start condition table 222b stipulates that the standing accessory 410 and the central swinging accessory 720 are at the origin position as conditions for starting the operation of the tilting accessory 510. Further, as a condition for starting the operation of the standing accessory 410, it is stipulated that the tilting accessory 510 and the central swinging accessory 720 are at the origin position. Further, as a condition for starting the descent operation of the central swinging accessory 720, it is stipulated that the tilting accessory 510 and the standing accessory 410 are at the origin position. By operating each accessory constituting the group 2 in accordance with these conditions, it is possible to prevent the accessories constituting the group 2 from interfering with each other. Therefore, when the accessories interfere with each other, the accessory is damaged, and the operation of the accessory is hindered by another accessory, so that the operation of the accessory and the display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. It is possible to prevent the content of the displayed display effect from being deviated from the display effect, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the group is not set, and the order of operations, the operation prohibition condition, and the like are set in detail for each accessory. However, in recent years, the number and types of accessories to be mounted on gaming machines have been increasing. Therefore, if various conditions are set for all the accessories, the work load of the designer will increase and the operating conditions will increase. There is a problem that the data capacity of the data table for defining the above is also increased.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the plurality of accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 are divided into a group 1 composed of only the accessories that do not interfere with other accessories, and within the group. The group is divided into group 2 composed of the characters that may interfere with the characters of the above. Then, as the operation start condition specified in the operation start condition table 222b, only the condition for the accessory belonging to the group 2 is specified. As a result, the amount of data in the operation start condition table 222b can be reduced, so that a storage device having a small capacity can be adopted as the ROM 222. Therefore, since an inexpensive storage device can be introduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In this modification, as the operation condition of the group 2, when the accessory 1 constituting the group 2 is operated, the operation can be started only when the other accessory of the group 2 is not operating. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, an accessory (accessory A) that may interfere with other accessories only during operation (that is, it cannot interfere with other accessories in Group 2 at the origin position and the overhang position). May be added to the configuration, or an accessory (accessory B) that may interfere only with a specific accessory of Group 2 (for example, the standing accessory 410) may be added to the configuration. In this configuration, for example, as the operating condition of the standing accessory 410, in addition to the condition that the tilting accessory 510 and the central swinging accessory 720 are at the origin position, "the accessory A is at the origin position or tension. The condition that "it is in the out position" and the condition that the accessory B is not operating may be added. In this way, even if the number of accessories to be operated is increased, the operation of the accessories can be preferably set.

Next, the power supply recovery operation table 222d in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the power supply recovery operation table 222d in this modified example. The power recovery operation table 222d is a table that is referred to when the power recovery operation is executed, as in the first embodiment.

In this modification, the operation is roughly divided into three stages (operations of operation scenario 1 to operation scenario 3). In the power recovery operation table 222d, the types of accessories to be operated are defined for each of the above stages (operation scenarios). Specifically, in the operation scenario 1, the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840, the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520, and the power return operation of the tilting accessory 510 are performed at the same time. It is stipulated that it will be executed. That is, it is stipulated that a plurality of accessories belonging to group 1 and one accessory belonging to group 2 be operated at the same time. As described above, since the accessory belonging to the group 1 can be operated without interfering with other accessories, a plurality of accessories can be operated at the same time. On the other hand, since the characters belonging to group 2 may interfere with each other with other characters belonging to group 2, it is stipulated that only one character is operated at a time so as not to cause interference. There is. In the operation scenario 1, all the accessories of the group 1 are not moved at the same time, and only the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840 and the rotating accessory 520 of the group 1 accessories are operated. The purpose of the configuration is to prevent the total load current (power consumption) from exceeding the current capacity (rated power).

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), as the content of the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is extended from the origin position. After operating up to (see FIG. 10), the operation of returning to the origin position is executed (see FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520, an operation of rotating the rotating accessory 520 clockwise once to return to the origin position and then rotating it counterclockwise once to stop at the origin position is executed. (See FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the tilting accessory 510, an operation of operating the tilting accessory 510 from the origin position to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9) is performed, and then the tilting accessory 510 is returned to the origin position and stopped (FIG. 83 (FIG. 8). b) See).

In the operation scenario 2 executed after the power return operation of the tilting accessory 510 is completed, the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is executed following the operation scenario 1. This is because the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is configured to take a longer time than the other accessory. Further, since the operation of the tilting accessory 510 belonging to the group 2 is completed, the new accessory belonging to the group 2 can be operated, so that the power return operation of the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is performed in parallel. It is stipulated that it will be executed. In the operation scenario 1, if the power return operation of the rotating accessory 520 of the group 1 is not completed, the operation may be performed across the operation scenario 2. This is because the rotating accessory 520 belonging to the group 1 does not interfere with other accessories, and therefore has no effect on the other accessories even if it straddles the operation scenario 2.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), as the power return operation of the standing accessory 410, the standing accessory 410 is operated from the origin position to the overhang position (see FIG. 8) and then returned to the origin position. The operation of stopping is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)).

Further, in the operation scenario 3 executed after the power return operation of the standing accessory 410 is completed, the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is executed following the operation scenario 2. This is because, as described above, the power return operation of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is configured to take a longer time than the other accessories. Further, the power return operation of the left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730 belonging to Group 1 is started. Further, when the operation of the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is completed, a new accessory belonging to the group 2 can be operated, so that the power return operation of the central rocking accessory 720 is started.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the power return operation of the left swinging accessory 710 and the right swinging accessory 730 is performed at the origin position after each swinging accessory is oscillated. The operation of stopping is performed (see FIG. 83 (b)). Further, as the power return operation of the central rocking accessory 720, an operation of operating the central rocking accessory 720 from the origin position to the overhanging position (see FIG. 13) and then returning to the origin position and stopping the operation is performed. (See FIG. 83 (b)).

Further, although not shown, the END data is read out when the operation scenario is updated after the control based on the operation scenario 3 is completed. By defining this END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is the end timing of the power recovery operation.

As described above, in the power recovery operation table 222d of this modification, when the power recovery operation is executed, the power recovery operation is executed one by one for the accessories of the group 2 that cannot be operated at the same time. Is stipulated as. Further, the group 1 accessory that does not interfere with the other accessory is configured to be operated while the power return operation of any of the group 2 accessories is being executed. As a result, the power recovery operation can be executed in parallel for a plurality of accessories, so that the time required for the power recovery operation to be completed can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the accessory operation setting table 222e in this modification will be described. Similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the accessory operation setting table 222e is a data table in which the operation timing of the accessory and the accessory to be operated are defined for each type of effect. As described above, in this modification, one or a plurality of accessories that are operated at the same time are not configured as a group, but the groups are distinguished according to whether or not they interfere with other accessories. Therefore, in the accessory operation setting table 222e in this modification, the accessory itself to start the operation is specified for each group.

Specifically, in the opening effect, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 is defined as an accessory to start the operation at the start of the effect. On the other hand, the accessories belonging to Group 2 are not specified. Further, in the detached super reach and the shared super reach, the swinging accessories 710, 720, and 730 belonging to the group 1 are defined as the accessories to start the operation after 8 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, the accessories belonging to Group 2 are not specified. Further, as the accessory that starts the operation after 15 seconds have elapsed, the rotating accessory 520 belonging to the group 1 and the tilting accessory 510 belonging to the group 2 are defined.

In the detached special reach A and the shared special reach A, the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 is defined as the accessory that starts the operation 8 seconds after the start of the production. On the other hand, the accessories belonging to Group 1 are not specified. Further, as the accessory that starts the operation after 15 seconds have elapsed, the rotating accessory 520 belonging to the group 1 and the tilting accessory 510 belonging to the group 2 are defined. Further, as the accessory to start the operation after 25 seconds have elapsed, the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 and the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 are defined.

In the detached special reach B and the shared special reach B, the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, 840, and the rotating accessory 520 belonging to the group 1 are used as the accessories to start the operation 8 seconds after the start of the production. The devoted accessory 510 belonging to Group 2 is defined. In addition, a standing accessory 410 belonging to group 2 is defined as an accessory that starts operation after 15 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, the accessories belonging to Group 1 are not specified. Further, as the accessory to start the operation after 25 seconds have elapsed, the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 and the standing accessory 410 belonging to the group 2 are defined.

In the special reach, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to group 1, a rotating accessory 520, and a tilting accessory 510 belonging to group 2 are used as the accessory to start the operation 8 seconds after the start of the production. Is stipulated. In addition, a standing accessory 410 belonging to group 2 is defined as an accessory that starts operation after 15 seconds have elapsed. Further, as the accessory to start the operation after 25 seconds have elapsed, the slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 belonging to the group 1 and the descent operation of the central swinging accessory 720 belonging to the group 2 are defined.

As described above, in the accessory operation setting table 222e of the present embodiment, the accessory to be started to operate at each effect start timing is defined separately for the accessory belonging to the group 1 and the accessory belonging to the group 2. There is. As a result, instead of discriminating between the accessory specified in the operation start condition table 222b and the accessory to be started, only the accessory specified as the accessory belonging to group 2 in the accessory operation setting table 222e is selected. It may be a judgment target. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced in the process for determining the operation start condition.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the accessory control process 3 (S1341) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification. This accessory control process 3 (S1341) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed instead of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. It is a process to be performed.

Of the accessory control processes 3 (S1341), the processes S1401 and S1403 to S1405 are the same as the processes S1401 and S1403 to S1405 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Then, in the accessory control process 3 (S1341) of the present embodiment, when the process of S1405 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S1403 that there is no accessory for which the operation stop should be set (S1403). : No), the operation start setting process, which is a process for setting the operation start of the accessory, is executed (S1431), and this process is terminated. The details of this operation start setting process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG. 87. If it is determined that the initialization flag 223g is on in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), then the initial operation process 3 is executed (S1432) to end this process. Details of this initial operation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the initial operation process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process 3. This initial operation process 3 is a process for setting the power supply return operation of the accessory, as in the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment.

In each of the initial operation processes 3 (S1432), S1501 to S1509 and S1512 to S1514, the processes S1501 to S1509 and S1512 to S1514 of the initial operation process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as is executed. Further, in the initial operation process 3 (S1432) of this modification, if it is determined that the operation stop period has expired in the process of S1509 (S1509: Yes), then whether or not the operation scenario execution flag 223n is turned on. (S1531), and if it is on (S1531), it means that one of the operation scenarios (see FIG. 83 (a)) is being executed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1532). Then, when it is determined that the power recovery operation is in progress based on the operation scenario (see FIG. 83 (a)) in which the accessory of the group 2 is set (S1532: No), the power recovery operation is continued in the current operation scenario. Since it is sufficient to execute, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1532, if it is determined that the power return operation of the accessory of the group 2 has been completed (S1532: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to off (S1533), and this process is terminated. .. By setting the operation scenario execution flag 223n to off, a new scenario can be started in the next initial operation setting process 3.

If it is determined in the process of S1531 that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is off (S1531: No), the operation scenario is updated (S1534), and the updated operation scenario is read (S1535). For example, if the completed operation scenario is operation scenario 1, operation scenario 2 is newly read.

Further, in the initial operation process 3 of this modification, when the process of S1512 is completed, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1536), and the process is ended. By turning on the operation scenario execution flag 223n, the power return operation of the accessory can be executed according to the currently selected operation scenario.

By executing the initial operation process 3 (see FIG. 86) in this way, the power restoration operation of the accessory of the group 1 is executed in parallel with the power restoration operation of the accessory of the group 2 in order. be able to. Therefore, the power recovery operation can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation start setting process (S1431). In this operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory for which the operation start should be set (S4201), and when it is determined that there is no accessory for which the operation start should be set (S4201: No), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that there is an accessory for which the operation start should be set (S4201: Yes), then there is an accessory belonging to group 2 among the accessories for which the operation start should be set. Whether or not it is determined (S4202). That is, in the accessory operation setting table 222e (see FIG. 84), it is determined whether or not the accessory data of the group 2 is not blank (Null data). Then, when there is an accessory belonging to group 2 (that is, the data of the accessory in group 2 is not Null data) (S4202), the operation start condition specified in the operation start condition table 222b is read out (S4203). , It is determined whether or not the operation start condition is satisfied (S4204).

If it is determined that the operation start condition is satisfied as a result of the determination by the process of S4204 (S4204: Yes), the process is shifted to S4207. Further, in the process of S4202, even when it is determined that there is no accessory belonging to group 2 among the accessories to be started (that is, the accessory belongs to group 1) (S4202: No), S4203 to S4203 to The process of S4206 is skipped, and the process shifts to S4207. When all the accessories whose operation start should be set belong to group 1, skipping the processing of S4203 to S4206 interferes with other accessories even if the accessory belonging to group 1 is operated. This is because there is no possibility and it is not necessary to read the operation start condition from the operation start condition table 222b to determine whether or not the operation can be started. In this way, by grouping from the viewpoint of whether or not there is a possibility of interfering with other accessories, it is possible to omit the process of determining the operation start condition for the accessories of group 1. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

If it is determined in the process of S4204 that the operation start condition is not satisfied (S4204: No), the operation start of the group 2 accessory that does not satisfy the operation start condition is canceled (S4205), and the canceled accessory is used. The corresponding display alternative effect command is set (S4206), and the process shifts to S4207. As described above, since the operation start condition is not set for the accessory of the group 1, the operation start is not canceled in the process of S4205. That is, in order to prevent interference with other accessories, only the minimum operation of the accessory can be canceled.

In the process of S4202, when it is determined that there is no accessory belonging to group 2 among the accessories to be started (S4202: No), the accessory to be started includes the accessory of group 2 and , When the accessory belonging to the group 2 satisfies the operation start condition (S4204: Yes), or in the process of S4207 executed after the process of S4206 is completed, the accessory is stored in the load value storage area 223e. The value obtained by adding the total drive load value and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory for which it is determined that the operation start should be set is stored in the determination value storage area 223j (S4207).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S4208). Then, when it is determined that the stored value is 100 or less (S4208: No), even if the accessory determined to be started in the process of S4201 is operated, it is supplied to the accessory motor 229. Since it means that the total value of the load currents to be performed falls within the range of the current capacity or less, the accessory operation start is set and the accessory operation start is set among the bits of the accessory operation flag 223i. 1 is set in the bit corresponding to (S4209). Then, the value stored in the discriminant value storage area 223j (the total drive load value stored in the load value storage area 223e) and the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory determined to set the operation start are added. The total value of the drive load is updated by storing the value) in the load value storage area 223e (S4210), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4208, when it is determined that the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j is larger than 100 (S4208: Yes), the operation start of the accessory is canceled (S4211) and the alternative effect is displayed. An alternative effect command for display is set (S4212), and this process ends. When the display alternative effect command is set in the process of S4206, the display alternative effect command by this process is overwritten. The display alternative effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display alternative effect command, the display control device 114 starts the alternative effect (see FIGS. 25 and 26 (b)) corresponding to the accessory whose operation stop has been canceled in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even if the movement of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to execute a display effect that makes the accessory feel as if it has moved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production has the same expectation as when the character moves, so that the player can play the game while having an appropriate expectation for each production. Can be done.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the accessories that do not have the possibility of interfering with other accessories are defined as group 1, and they may interfere with each other by varying them. The accessory is defined as Group 2. Then, the operating conditions are defined for each of the accessories constituting the group 2, and the accessories belonging to the group 2 are operated according to the operating conditions. As a result, the accessories that make up Group 1 can be changed (freely) without restrictions, except for the current capacity (rated power). Therefore, the degree of freedom of movement of the accessories constituting the group 1 can be increased. In addition, it is possible to prevent problems such as damage to the accessory due to interference between the accessories. Further, since the operation start condition is set only for the accessory of the group 2 instead of setting the operation order and the interference condition for all the accessories, the operation condition can be simplified. .. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

In this modification, a group 1 composed of accessories that do not interfere with each other and a group 2 composed of accessories that may interfere with each other are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, a plurality of groups composed of accessories that do not interfere with each other may be provided. In this case, the accessories to be operated at the same time (for example, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840) may be grouped into one group, and a predetermined operation may be performed according to the group. .. As a result, when operating the accessory, the operation may be set for each group instead of setting the operation for each accessory, so that the processing load can be reduced. Further, although it does not interfere with the characters of other groups, a plurality of groups composed of the characters that interfere with the characters in the same group may be provided. As a result, even if the types of accessories increase and the interference conditions become complicated, the operating conditions of each accessory can be simplified. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

In this modification, the pachinko machine 10 that interferes with each other when the other characters belonging to the group 2 are changed when the character 1 constituting the group 2 is in the overhanging position has been described, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. As the accessory constituting the group 2, if another accessory is operated in the middle of changing the accessory of 1, there is a risk of interfering with each other, but the accessory of 1 stops at the origin position or the overhanging position. If so, the configuration may include accessories that are not likely to interfere with each other. For example, when a set of rod-shaped accessories that are parallel to each other when they are in the origin position and the overhang position are changed in an arc shape so as to be close to the other accessory starting from one end of each. Can be mentioned. That is, it is possible to move from the origin position to the overhang position by changing 180 degrees from one end of the accessory, or conversely, to move to the origin position by changing 180 degrees from the overhang position. An example can be used as an accessory. In this case, as the operation condition of the group 2, the operation can be started only when the other accessory is in the origin position or the overhang position (that is, the other accessory in the group 2 is not variable). ) Should be specified.

In this modification, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), and whether or not to cancel the operation start of the accessory is determined. It does, but it doesn't have to be. For example, in the case of a model in which there are few types of accessories and the load current (power consumption) is less than the current capacity (rated power) even if all the accessories that can be changed at the same time are operated, or the current capacity (rated power) When a sufficiently large power supply device 115 is used, it is possible to omit the determination of the load current (power consumption). As a result, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the load reference value table 222c of the ROM 222, the load value storage area 223e of the RAM 223, and the discrimination value storage area 223j can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

<About the second modification in the first embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. In the first embodiment described above, when setting the operation of the accessory, when it is determined that the total value of the load reference values exceeds 100, the operation of all the accessories for which the operation is to be newly set is cancelled. It was configured like this. On the other hand, in the second modification, the priority of stopping the operation is set for each accessory, and the operation is stopped from the accessory having the highest priority. As a result, even if it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more accessories can be operated.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the priority table 222f in which the priority order of the accessory is defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 It is provided, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in.

<About the electrical configuration of the second modification in the first embodiment>
Next, the priority table 222f added to the ROM 222 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 89. As described above, the priority table 222f is a table in which the priority is set when the operation stop is set. In the priority table 222f, the smaller the priority number, the higher the priority for stopping the operation.

FIGS. 89A and 89B are diagrams showing an example of the priority table 222f, respectively. In this priority table 222f, the priority when setting the operation stop is defined for each type of accessory.

FIG. 89A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the priority table 222f when the priority is higher for the accessory having a larger drive load reference value. As shown in the figure, the tilting accessory 510 having the largest drive load reference value has the highest priority. In addition, although there are a plurality of accessories having the second highest drive load reference value (that is, accessories having a drive load reference value of 15), the one that performs the effect operation independently is set to have a higher priority. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent only a part of the slide accessories 810, 820, 830, and 840 that operate at the same time from stopping. Similarly, with respect to the rotating accessory 520, the left swinging accessory 710, and the right swinging accessory 730 having the lowest drive load reference value, the priority of the swinging accessories 710 and 730 that are simultaneously operated in the production is lowered. Therefore, the swinging accessories 710 and 730 are configured to operate together as much as possible.

By determining the accessory to be stopped based on the priority table 222f, when it is determined that the load current (power consumption) exceeds the current capacity (rated power), more accessories are started to operate. be able to.

Further, FIG. 89B is another example of the priority table 222f. In the example of FIG. 89 (b), the operation stop is set in units of the accessory (for example, each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840) that is operated in combination in various effects. .. That is, the priority for setting the operation stop is set higher in descending order of the load reference value for each unit to be operated at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the production because only a part of the accessory that normally operates in combination operates.

In the example of FIG. 89 (b), the priority of each slide accessory 810, 820, 830, 840 is the highest, followed by the priority of the combination of the tilting accessory 510 and the rotating accessory 520. .. Further, each swinging accessory 710, 730 is defined as one unit of the accessory having the third highest priority, then the standing accessory 410 is defined, and the central shaking is defined as the lowest priority accessory. The moving object 720 is specified.

In this way, by preferentially stopping the movement of the accessory that operates in combination, only a part of the accessory that operates in combination usually operates, and the player feels uncomfortable with the content of the production. It can be suppressed.

The method of prioritizing is not limited to this. For example, the priority may be set according to the distance from the third symbol display device 81 that the player will pay attention to during the normal game. That is, the farther the third symbol display device 81 is, the more difficult it is for the player to notice the presence or absence of the movement of the accessory. Therefore, even if the farther the third symbol display device 81 is, the higher the priority for setting the operation stop is set. good. As a result, even when the movement of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the movement has been cancelled.

Further, for example, the accessory that operates independently may be configured to have a higher priority for stopping the operation. For example, if a plurality of slides such as 810, 820, 830, and 840 are stopped, it becomes easy for the player to notice that the movement is stopped. There is a risk. Therefore, by stopping the accessory that operates independently, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the operation has been cancelled.

Further, for example, the accessory that gives some notification to the player depending on the operation content may be configured to have a lower priority for canceling the operation. For example, if a roulette-shaped accessory is included in the configuration and the position where the roulette needle stops is used to notify whether or not it is a big hit, if the operation is canceled during the operation of the roulette-shaped accessory, There is a risk that the needle of the roulette-shaped accessory will stop at a position different from the original lottery result of the special symbol. That is, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the lottery result of the special symbol. On the other hand, by configuring the operation of the accessory that gives some notification to the player to be difficult to cancel, the player can be made to accurately recognize the content of the notification by the accessory.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device of the second modification in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the second modification in the first embodiment will be described. First, the accessory control process 4 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 90. This accessory control process 4 (S1351) is changed to the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This is the process to be executed.

In each of the accessory control processes 4 (S1351), S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411, respectively, S1401 to S1406 and S1408 to S1411 of the accessory control process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the accessory control process 4 (S1351) of the present embodiment, in the process of S1409, the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (the drive load reference value corresponding to the operating accessory, and the start of operation are newly performed. When it is determined that the total drive load reference value to be set) is larger than 100 (S1441), the adjustment control process, which is a process for stopping the operation of the accessory according to the priority order, is executed (S1441). This process ends. By executing this adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more accessories while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity.

Next, the details of this adjustment control process (S1441) will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an adjustment control process (S1441) for setting the operation stop of the accessory according to the priority order. In this adjustment control process (S1441), first, the operation priority data is read from the priority table 222f (S4301). Next, among the accessories for which the operation data is set, the operation data of the accessory having the highest priority for stopping the operation is set to be released (S4302), and the value stored in the discrimination value storage area 223j (during operation). From the total of the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory and the drive load reference value for which the operation start should be newly set), the drive load reference value corresponding to the accessory set to be released by the processing of S4302 is subtracted. (S4303). Next, by setting an alternative display effect command corresponding to the accessory for which the operation data release is set, the display effect is set to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 in place of the accessory whose operation has been released. (S4304). As a result, even if the operation of the accessory is canceled, it is possible to display an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort.

When the processing of S4304 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the total value of the subtracted drive load reference values in the processing of S4303 exceeds 100 (S4305), and if it is determined to exceed 100 (S4305: Yes), it is again determined. The process is shifted to S4302, and each process of S4302 to S4305 is repeated until the total of the drive load reference values becomes 100 or less.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4305, when it is determined that the total of the drive load reference values is 100 or less (S4305: No), the operation of the accessory is performed by setting the drive data of the accessory for which the operation data is set. The start is set (S4306), and 1 is set in each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i corresponding to the accessory for which the operation start is set (S4307). Then, the total drive load value of the load value storage area e is updated based on each bit of the accessory operation flag 223i updated in the process of S4307 and the load reference value table 222c (S4308), and this process is completed. do.

By executing this adjustment control process (S1441), it is possible to operate more accessories while keeping the load current (power consumption) within the range of the current capacity.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification, the priority of stopping the operation is set for each accessory, and the operation is stopped from the accessory having the highest priority. As a result, even if it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded, more accessories can be operated.

<About the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the second embodiment described above, by reducing the load current (power consumption) of the LCD backlight 230, a larger load current (power consumption) can be used for the operation of the accessory motor 229. rice field.

As this advanced type, in this modified example, various examples in which the period in which the load current (power consumption) is low in one configuration and the period in which the load current (power consumption) is high in the other configuration are matched will be described. That is, various examples for preventing the load current (power consumption) of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole from rising too much will be described. Examples of the period in which the load current (power consumption) is high include a period in which the LED current of the LED such as the backlight 230 for LCD is turned on and a period in which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229. .. Further, examples of the period during which the load current (power consumption) is high include a period during which the LED current of the LED such as the backlight 230 for LCD is turned on, a period during which excitation is not set for the accessory motor 229, and the like. Be done.

First, an example of matching the period in which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off with the period in which excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the timed change of the LED current value of the LCD backlight 230 and the timing of setting the excitation for the accessory motor 229. As shown in the figure, in this modification, the periods a to g are associated with the period when the LCD backlight 230 is off. In this modification, the excitation is set for the accessory motor 229 during these periods a to g. More specifically, for example, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 periodically turns on and off at an on period of 80% and an off period of 20%. Is set.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the origin return operation and the power return return operation of the accessory are executed. In these origin return and power supply return operations, it is necessary to set the operation for a plurality of accessories, so that the load current (power consumption) supplied to the accessory motor 229 tends to increase. Therefore, in this modification, the operation of one step of the accessory motor 229 is set every time the LED of the LCD backlight 230 is turned off (each period of a to g). As a result, it is possible to prevent the load current (power consumption) from increasing momentarily, and the total load current (power) supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 can be used as an average value or an instantaneous value. It can be contained within the capacity (rated power).

In this modification, the off period of the LCD backlight 230 is set as the audio lamp so that the timing of setting the excitation for the accessory motor 229 and the off period of the LCD backlight 230 do not deviate from each other. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 is configured to be graspable. Specifically, the reference signal (synchronous signal) used by the LED driver that controls the backlight 230 for the LCD to periodically set the on period and the off period of the LED is transmitted to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. It is configured so that it can be output. Based on this reference signal, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether the backlight 230 for LCD is currently on or off, and sets the excitation when it is off. It is configured in.

In the above modification, the LED driver is configured to output a reference signal to the MPU 221. On the contrary, the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a means for generating a reference signal (synchronous signal), and the LED. It may be configured to output a reference signal to the driver.

Next, an example in which the LCD backlight 230 is associated with a plurality of areas of the third symbol display device 81 and independently controlled will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). In this example, the upper three-quarter area of the screen is defined as the area a, the lower quarter area of the screen is defined as the area b, and the lighting timing of the LEDs constituting the LCD backlight 230 is set for each area. It is configured to be variable. That is, it is configured to set different control commands for the LED driver in the area a and the area b.

As a configuration for making the lighting timing variable in the area a and the area b, for example, LED bars are provided on the upper and lower sides of the screen, and the upper and lower LED bars are connected to different channels of the LED driver. By connecting them, the upper and lower LED bars may be controlled independently. In this case, as the light guide plate for evenly irradiating the back surface of the liquid crystal panel with the light of the LED bar, one having a shape that covers each of the area a and the area b may be adopted. That is, a light guide plate (light guide plate A) having substantially the same shape as the region a is provided on the back surface of the portion of the liquid crystal panel corresponding to the region a, and a light guide plate (light guide plate B) having substantially the same shape as the region b is provided on the liquid crystal panel. It is provided on the back surface of the portion corresponding to the area b. As a result, the light from the LED bar provided on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate A, so that the incident light can be uniformly irradiated to the region a. .. Further, since the light from the LED bar provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is incident on the light guide plate B, the incident light can be uniformly irradiated to the region b. ..

FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a timed change of the LED current flowing through the LED bar (LEDa) for illuminating the area a and the LED bar (LEDb) for illuminating the area b. As shown in FIG. 92B, in this modification, the lighting phase of the LED is inverted between the LEDa and the LEDb, and the LED current of one LED bar is off (the period when the LED is off) and the other. The LED current of the LED bar is turned on (lighting state).

More specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 92B, from the state where the LED current of LEDa is off and the LED current of LEDb is on, the LED current of LEDa rises on and the LED current of LEDb rises. Go down off. Then, after a certain period of time (for example, LED lighting frequency 320 Hz, 1.5 ms when the ON period is 50%) elapses, the LED current of the LEDa turns off and the LED current of the LEDb rises on. Then, this state is maintained for a certain period of time (for example, 1.5 ms), and when the certain period of time elapses, the LED current of the LEDa turns on again and the LED current of the LEDb falls off. After that, the LED current of the LEDa and the LED current of the LEDb are switched on / off every 1.5 ms. As a result, the peak current can be reduced as compared with the case where the ON periods of LEDa and LEDb are synchronized. Further, by setting the ON periods of LEDa and LEDb to be the same length (50% in this specific example), the brightness of LEDa and the brightness of LEDb can be made equal. That is, since the apparent brightness can be made equal in the area a and the area b, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in the appearance of the third symbol display device 81.

The lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230 is not limited to 320 Hz, and may be arbitrarily set as long as the frequency is so high that the player cannot recognize the on period and the off period. At least, if the frequency is set to be equal to or higher than the update frequency (50 Hz in this embodiment) of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, if one cycle of the on period and the off period is set to 20 milliseconds or less). , It is possible to set at least one on period during the period when each image is displayed. That is, by matching the period in which a part of the image is displayed with the off period of the LCD backlight 230, it is possible to prevent the part of the image displayed in the off period from becoming invisible. Can be done. Therefore, since all the images sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. can.

In this specific example, the on-period and the off-period of the LED current are both set to 50%, and the apparent brightness of the area a and the area b are the same, but the brightness of the area b is darker than that of the area a. It may be configured as follows. For example, the period during which the LED current of the LEDa is on may be 80%, and the period during which the LED current is off may be 20%. Then, the LED b may be turned on only during the off period of the LED a. This is because the region b provided on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81 is a portion that is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to, and therefore, even if the brightness is low, it is unlikely to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, both the on-period and the off-period of the LED current of the LEDa may be left at 50%, and only the on-period of the LED current of the LEDb may be shortened (for example, 20%). That is, the LED current of the LEDb may be set to be turned on at a timing such that the on period of the LEDb is included in the period of 1.5 ms when the LED current of the LEDa is turned off. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load current (power consumption) in the region b, which is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to (that is, the change is difficult for the player to recognize even if the brightness changes). Therefore, it is possible to save energy in the pachinko machine 10 while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the peak of the LED current value can be reduced more reliably.

Further, in the figure of FIG. 92B, the LEDb is set to be off at the same time when the LEDa is turned on, and the LEDb is set to be turned on at the same time when the LEDa is turned off. The timing of turning on the LED may be delayed. As a result, for example, even if the LED current value falls slowly when the LEDa is turned off (that is, even if the LEDa current value does not turn off momentarily), the LEDb is set to on. The current value of the LEDa can be turned off during the delay. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the LEDa and the LEDb from being turned on at the same time.

Note that this control is not limited to the LED of the LCD backlight 230. For example, the overall peak current of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by shifting the lighting phases of the lighting LEDs (illumination units 29 to 33) provided at different positions. In addition, by making the brightness of the lighting LED, which is relatively difficult for the player to pay attention to, to be darker than that of the lighting LED, which is easily visible to the player, the pachinko machine does not give the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to save energy in the machine 10.

Further, the above control is not limited to LEDs of the same type. For example, the lighting phase of the LED of the backlight 230 for LCD and the lighting phase of the LED for illumination are staggered, and one LED is used. The other LED may be configured to be on while is off. Further, the above control is not limited to the LED current value, and the timing of operating the accessory motor 229 and the lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 or the lighting LED may be controlled so as not to overlap. By shifting the operation timings of the accessory motors 229 from each other, the current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 may be prevented from being momentarily increased.

As a specific example of shifting the on-period of the load current supplied to different configurations, the period during which the LED current of the LCD backlight 230 is turned on and the period during which the LED current value of the lighting LED is turned on The case of shifting the LED will be described in detail. In this specific example, the case where the LCD backlight 230 is electrically connected to the display control device 114 will be described as an example. That is, the on-period of the load current supplied for the configuration controlled by different control devices (the lighting LED controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the LCD backlight 230 controlled by the display control device 114). An example of shifting the off period will be described. That is, when controlling the LED for illumination, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver. On the other hand, when controlling the LCD backlight 230, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 outputs a lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver.

In this case, the LED on period and the off period of the LED are set by the LED driver (illumination driver) provided on the LED for illumination and the LED driver (driver for backlight) provided on the backlight for LCD. If the reference signals (synchronization signals) for the above are not matched, there is a risk that the lighting periods will overlap with the passage of time. That is, if the frequencies of the reference signals do not match, the on periods may overlap with the passage of time even if the on periods do not overlap at the start of control. Further, even if the frequencies of the reference signals are the same, if the generation timing of the reference signal is deviated and the timing of starting the setting of the lighting state for each LED is deviated, the ON periods of the LEDs are different from each other. There is a risk of duplication.

Therefore, in this modification, the display control device 114 is configured to periodically output a synchronization signal to the voice lamp control device 113, and each LED (illumination) is based on the timing at which the synchronization signal is output. LED and the LED of the backlight 230 for LCD) are configured to control on / off. That is, the same synchronization signal is output to the LED driver that drives the LED for illumination and the driver that drives the backlight 230 for LCD.

As the synchronization signal, for example, a V interrupt signal (vertical synchronization interrupt signal) output by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds may be used. That is, the V interrupt signal configured to be output from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231 may be branched so as to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 as well. Then, the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 may be configured to output the V interrupt signal as it is to the corresponding LED driver. As a result, the on period and the off period can be set for each LED driver based on the same synchronization signal, so that the on periods overlap with each other and the load current (power consumption) momentarily increases. It is possible to suppress the increase.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has information that the on period is 50% as a lighting control command to be output to the backlight driver (lighting rate data 80H, 128 sections out of 255 divisions of one cycle are turned on). And the information that the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal) is input externally, and the first half of one cycle is set to the on period (the on period starts from the first section of each section that divides one cycle into 255 equal parts). Set the lighting control command that includes the information. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 is turned on at the same time as the V interrupt signal is detected, and the ON state is held for 10 ms (50% of 20 ms, which is the generation cycle of the V interrupt signal), and then the LCD backlight is turned on. 230 can be set off until the next V interrupt signal.

On the other hand, in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114, information that the ON period is 50% with respect to the LED driver for driving the LED for lighting (lighting rate data 7FH, 127 out of 255 divisions of one cycle). Information that the synchronization signal (V interrupt signal) is input externally, and the latter half of one cycle is set to the on period (on from the 129th section of each section that divides one cycle into 255 equal parts). Set a command that includes the information (start the period). As a result, the LED for illumination is turned off at the same time as the V interrupt signal is detected, and the off state is held for 10 ms (50% of 20 ms, which is the generation cycle of the V interrupt signal), and then the backlight for LCD. 230 can be set on until the next V interrupt signal.

By outputting the above-mentioned lighting control command to the corresponding LED driver, the on period and the off period can be inverted between the LED for illumination and the backlight 230 for LCD, so that each part of the pachinko machine 10 can be used. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the load current (electric power) supplied from rising temporarily.

The lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the lighting LED is associated with the command setting timing and is provided in the lighting setting table (illustrated) in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is specified in (None), the MPU 221 can easily select and set a lighting control command for executing the above control on the LED for illumination simply by referring to this illumination setting table. can.

Further, the lighting control command for setting the lighting operation for the LCD backlight 230 is defined as an LCD setting table in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in association with the command setting timing, and is used for boot processing. (See FIG. 45) transfers to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 can easily select and set a lighting control command for executing the above control on the lighting LED simply by referring to the LCD setting table.

The control setting timing defined in the LED driver setting table and the lighting driver setting table is, for example, the timing of executing the light emission effect by the lighting LED. That is, when the illumination effect is performed by the illumination LED, the LCD backlight 230 is turned off during the illumination LED on period in order to cover the increase in the load current for the illumination LED. By matching the periods, it is possible to prevent the peak of the load current from rising momentarily. In a gaming machine in which the lighting LED is always in a light emitting state during the game, the power-on time may be defined as the setting timing of the above control.

As the LED driver, the above control may be adopted by using a driver that can specify the position and length of the on period described above with a simpler lighting control command. That is, an LED driver that can accept a lighting control command associated with the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal parts may be used for each bit of 8-bit data. In this case, as described above, in the LED driver of this embodiment, when an 8-bit command is received, the section corresponding to the bit 1 of the data is turned on and the section corresponding to the bit 0 of the data is turned off. The LED is controlled so as to do so. Further, as described above, the intervals earlier in time are associated in order from the lower bits of the 8-bit command. For example, if the control data is 0FH (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), the first four sections of each section divided into eight equal parts of one cycle are turned on and the latter four sections are turned off. Is controlled by.

When this driver is adopted, the 8-bit command output by the MPU 231 to the LED driver of the LCD backlight 230 and the 8-bit command output by the MPU 221 to the LED for lighting are mutually "1". By simply setting the bits in which the data of "" is stored do not overlap, it is possible to easily control the lighting of the LEDs so that the lighting periods of each other do not overlap. The command may be specified separately for the illumination setting table (not shown) and the LCD setting table (not shown). For example, only the illumination setting table is provided and the illumination setting table is provided. When the data setting timing specified in the above is reached, the lighting control command may be output to the LED driver corresponding to the LED for illumination and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Then, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the "1" data and the "0" data of each bit of the command are inverted, and the lighting control command is output to the LED driver corresponding to the LCD backlight 230. You may. For example, when "0FH" (that is, 000001111B in binary notation) is output as a lighting control command by the MPU 231, the "1" data and the "0" data of the lighting control command are input by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. By inverting it, it is converted into a lighting control command of "F0H" (that is, 11110000B in binary notation) and output to the LED driver. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 can be turned on and the lighting LED can be turned off during the first half of one cycle. Further, in the latter half of one cycle, the backlight 230 for LCD can be turned off and the LED for illumination can be turned on. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the on periods from overlapping each other, it is possible to prevent the load current (power consumption) supplied to each LED from increasing momentarily. Further, since only the illumination setting table needs to be provided and the LCD setting table can be omitted, the storage capacity can be reduced.

Further, this control can also be realized by using a simpler LED driver that can accept only LED on / off instructions (commands) by the MPU 221 and the MPU 231. That is, in the first 10 milliseconds of the V interrupt signal generation interval (1V period), the lighting LED (illumination units 29 to 33) is set to ON in the voice lamp control device 113, and the LCD is set in the display control device 114. The backlight 230 for LCD may be set to off, and the LED for illumination (illumination units 29 to 33) may be set to off and the backlight 230 for LCD may be set to on in the latter half of the 1V period of 10 milliseconds. .. More specifically, for example, in the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the voice lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the V interrupt signal has been received from the display control device 114, the lighting of the lighting LED is turned on. Configure to add the process to be set. On the other hand, in the display control device 114, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)) executed every time the V interrupt signal is detected, a process for setting the LCD backlight 230 to be turned off is added. Configure to. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 can be turned off at the same time as the lighting LED is turned on.

Further, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that the elapsed time from the detection of the V interrupt signal can be grasped, and when it is determined that 10 milliseconds have elapsed. The lighting LED is turned off and the LCD backlight 230 is turned on. As a result, the LCD backlight 230 can be turned on at the same time as the lighting LED is turned off. Then, by repeating these processes, it is possible to invert the lighting phase of the illumination LED (illumination units 29 to 33) and the lighting phase of the LCD backlight 210 without providing a dedicated synchronization signal. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting LEDs (lighting units 29 to 33) and the LCD backlight 230 from being turned on at the same time, so that the load current supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 ( It is possible to prevent the power consumption) from increasing momentarily.

In addition, by setting the on period and off period of each LED with reference to the V interrupt signal output every 20 milliseconds, the LED for illumination (illumination units 29 to 33) and the backlight for LCD It is possible to prevent the LED lighting timing from being deviated from that of 230. That is, even if the lighting timing of any of the LEDs shifts in a certain 1V period, the deviation that occurred in the previous 1V period is canceled by ending the 1V period and receiving the next V interrupt signal. Then, the on period and the off period of each LED can be set based on the new V interrupt signal.

It should be noted that only the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a time measuring means such as a timer for measuring 10 milliseconds, and when the sound lamp control device 113 turns off the lighting LED, a command to notify the fact ( The extinguishing command) may be configured to be output to the display control device 114. Further, in the command interrupt process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is determined whether or not the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is a turn-off command, and if it is a turn-off command. May be configured to add a process for setting the lighting of the LCD backlight 230. With such a configuration, it is not necessary for the display control device 114 to determine the elapsed time after detecting the V interrupt signal, so that the timing means can be omitted.

Further, for example, each time a V interrupt signal is received, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to switch on and off the lighting LEDs (lighting units 29 to 33), and the display control device 114 Then, each time the V interrupt signal is received, the LCD backlight 230 may be switched on and off at the timing opposite to that of the lighting LED (lighting units 29 to 33). By switching between the ON state and the OFF state of each LED triggered by the reception of the V interrupt signal, it is possible to prevent the timing of setting each LED into the ON period or the OFF period from being deviated. Further, since it is sufficient to simply switch between the ON state and the OFF state of the LED controlled by each control device triggered by the V interrupt signal, the elapsed time from receiving the V interrupt signal to each control device can be determined. There is no need to provide a configuration for timing. Therefore, the timekeeping means can be reduced.

The synchronization signal for setting the LED on period and the LED off period is not limited to the V interrupt signal. For example, a synchronization signal that is output with a period shorter than the V interrupt signal (for example, 3 milliseconds) may be separately generated.

Further, in the case of generating a synchronization signal different from the V interrupt signal, the location where the synchronization signal is generated is not limited to the display control device 114, and may be provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, for example. A clock means such as a crystal oscillator is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the synchronization signal periodically output from the clock means is branched to the MPU 221 and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. On the other hand, it may be configured to output each. By adopting a synchronization signal having a period shorter than the V interrupt signal (that is, a synchronization signal output at an interval shorter than the update interval of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81), 1 V interrupt is performed. The lighting period of the LCD backlight 230 can be set at least once during the 1V period from the update of the display image based on the signal to the output of the next V interrupt signal. Therefore, while displaying all the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the LCD backlight 230 turned on, the load current supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 increases momentarily. Can be suppressed.

Even when the LED on period is shifted between the LCD backlight 230 and the lighting LED (illumination units 29 to 33), the on period and the off period do not necessarily have to be the same length. For example, the ON period of the LCD backlight 230 may be longer than the ON period of the lighting LEDs (illumination units 29 to 33). Since the third symbol display device 81 is easier for the player's line of sight to concentrate (that is, easier to enter the field of view) than the LED for illumination (illumination units 29 to 33), the LED for illumination (illumination). Even if the on-period of parts 29 to 33) is shortened (that is, even if the LED for illumination becomes dark), it is difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the LED for illumination. As a method of lengthening the ON period of the LCD backlight 230, for example, instead of lengthening the ON period of the LCD backlight 230 to more than 50% (for example, 80%), an LED for illumination is used. The on-period of (illumination units 29 to 33) may be shortened (for example, 20%). Then, it may be configured to set one on period and the other off period. As a result, it is possible to shift (disperse) the period during which the LED current is turned on while brightening the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. That is, it is possible to prevent the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming momentarily high.

Further, as another method of lengthening the ON period of the backlight 230 for LCD, for example, the ON period of the backlight 230 for LCD is set to 50%, and the ON period of the LED for illumination (illumination units 29 to 33) is set to 50%. May be configured to be shorter (eg, 20%). Then, it may be configured to set one on period to the other off period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load current value supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 and prevent the load current value from becoming momentarily high.

Further, in this modification, the lighting frequency of the lighting LED and the lighting frequency of the LCD backlight 230 are matched (for example, 60 Hz or 320 Hz), but the lighting LED and the LCD back are matched. If the lighting period of the light 230 does not overlap, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the lighting frequency of the LED for illumination may be halved from the lighting frequency of the backlight 230 for LCD, and the length of the on period may be halved. With this configuration, the ON period of the lighting LED is set once while the ON period and the OFF period of the LCD backlight 230 are repeated twice. Further, the on period of the lighting LED is set during the off period of the LCD backlight 230. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the ON periods of the LEDs from overlapping, it is possible to prevent the load current (power consumption) supplied to each part of the pachinko machine 10 from temporarily increasing.

Further, in this modification, the state that the LED can take is either an on state or an off state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a different current value can be set for each LED, and while some LEDs are set to a high current value, the current values of the other LEDs are set to a low current value, thereby pachinko. It may be possible to prevent the total load current value supplied to each part of the machine 10 from becoming momentarily high.

<About the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 98. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, one or a plurality of accessories that do not interfere with each other are grouped, and operating conditions are set for each group. That is, when changing the accessory that constitutes one group, it operates only when the conditions that do not interfere with other groups are satisfied based on the operation conditions specified in the operation start condition table 222b. The start was configured to be configurable. In addition, each group is composed of accessories that operate all at once (execute the operation effect of the same system) at the operation timing such as the start of the effect. Further, in the third embodiment, when returning to the origin, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) (that is, the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor first becomes H when the opening / closing portion is closed from the open state). It was configured to return. That is, the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) was set as the origin position.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the characters that do not have the possibility of interfering with all other characters are grouped (Group 1), and the characters that may interfere with each other by changing the character are grouped. Are grouped (Group 2). Then, when the origin return operation is set, the origin return of the group 1 accessory and the group 2 accessory can be returned in parallel. As a result, the time required for returning to the origin can be shortened. Further, in this modification, the origin position is configured so that the opening / closing portion is completely closed (see FIG. 71 (d)) without changing the position or number of the light-shielding sensors. That is, the origin position of the opening / closing part is set to the closed state that occupies most of the normal game, and the position of the closed state can be detected based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor for switching between turning on and off the light emitting part. It is configured.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the third embodiment>
First, the operation start condition table 222b provided in the ROM 222 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). In the operation start condition table 222b of this modification, the types of the accessories constituting each group are changed with respect to the operation start condition table 222b of the third embodiment. Specifically, the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940, the claw-shaped accessory 1063, and the half-moon type accessory 1060 are group 2. In addition, movable accessories other than these are group 1. The accessory belonging to Group 1 is composed of an accessory that does not interfere with other accessories, such as an accessory that swings on the spot. Therefore, the operation start condition is not set in the operation start condition table 222b for the group 1. Further, the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are not provided with operating conditions because they do not interfere with other accessories, but it is necessary to execute relatively complicated control when returning to the origin. Therefore, it belongs to Group 2.

On the other hand, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 and the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 belonging to Group 2 are provided with operation start conditions, respectively. Specifically, as a condition for starting the operation of the claw-shaped accessory 1063, it is stipulated that the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is in the origin position or the overhanging position. Further, as a condition for starting the operation of the moon-shaped accessory 1060, it is stipulated that the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is at the origin position. By following these operating conditions, the accessories can be operated without interfering with each other.

Next, the origin return operation table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). The origin return operation table 222f of this modification defines three types of operation scenarios. In each operation scenario, any one of the accessories belonging to the group 2 is set to execute the origin return operation. In addition, in each operation scenario, the origin return is set in parallel with each accessory of the group 2 for the accessory of the group 1. Based on the origin return operation table 222f, the origin return operation of each accessory can be efficiently set. As described above, if the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is operated while the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is in the overhanging position, the claw-shaped accessories 1063 exposed from the upper and lower half-moon-shaped accessories 1060 will be displaced from each other. , There is a risk of interference with each other as the half-moon type accessory rotates. Therefore, in this modification, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is first returned to the origin position (operation scenario 2), and then the half-moon-shaped accessory 1060 is returned to the origin. As a result, it is possible to suppress interference between the accessories.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 of the present embodiment is provided with an operation scenario execution flag 223n and an initial operation flag 223o in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment.

The operation scenario execution flag 223n indicates whether or not each accessory is changed according to the operation scenario for setting the operation of the accessory, similarly to the operation scenario execution flag 223n in the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a flag. In the modified example of the first embodiment, the operation according to the operation scenario is set in the power return operation of the accessory that is executed after the origin return of the accessory is completed, but in this modified example, the origin is set. In the return, the operation according to the operation scenario is set. That is, the operation scenario execution flag 223n of this modification is configured to be set to ON when the operation according to the operation scenario is set in the origin return (see S1233 in FIG. 94).

The initial operation flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the origin return of the accessory belonging to the group 1 is being executed. If this initial operation flag 223o is on, it indicates that the origin return of the accessory belonging to group 1 is being executed, and if it is off, the origin return of group 1 is not performed (before the origin return is executed). Or after the home return is completed). This initial operation flag 223o is set to on when the home return of group 1 is set (see S1227 in FIG. 94), and is set to off when the home return of group 1 is completed (see S1239 in FIG. 94). ).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98. First, the origin return process (S1141) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the origin return process 3 (S1141).

The origin return process 3 is a process executed in place of the origin return process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the third embodiment in the start-up process (see FIG. 37), and moves each accessory to the origin position. This is a process for restoring.

In the origin return process 3 (see FIG. 94), first, an operation scenario execution flag 223n indicating whether or not the operation of the accessory based on any of the operation scenarios specified in the origin return operation table 222f is set is set. The state is determined (S1221). As described above, when the operation scenario execution flag 233n is on, it indicates that the operation is executed according to each operation scenario specified in the origin return operation table 222f, and when it is off, the operation scenario is set. Indicates that the specified operation has not been executed.

Then, when it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is not on (S1221: No), it means that the operation scenario is not set. Next, the origin return operation table 222f is read and the operation scenario is updated (S1221: No). S1222), the updated operation scenario is read (S1223). Then, it is determined whether or not the read operation scenario is END information (S1224), and if it is END information (S1224: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the read operation scenario is not END information (S1224: No), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start scenario of group 1 (operation scenario 1) (S1225).

In the process of S1225, when it is determined that the operation start scenario of the group 1 (that is, the operation scenario 1) (S1225: Yes), the accessory of the group 1 is set by setting the initial operation command of the group 1. The operation is started (S1226), the initial operation flag 223o is set to ON (S1227) to indicate that the group 1 is returning to the origin, and the process shifts to S1228. As described above, the initial operation flag 223o is a flag indicating that the accessory of group 1 is returning to the origin when it is on, and indicating that the origin of group 1 is not returning when it is off. be. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1225 that it is not the operation scenario of the group 1 (S1224), the process is shifted to S1228.

In the process of S1228, it is determined whether or not the operation scenario read from the origin return operation table 222f is the origin return (operation scenario 2) of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (S1228), and the return operation of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is performed. When this is performed, the claw-shaped accessory restoration process is executed (S1231), and the process shifts to S1233. If the read operation scenario is not the origin return of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) (S1228: No), it is an operation scenario (operation scenario 3) in which the half-moon type accessory 1060 is returned to the origin. In the case of a scenario (that is, operation scenario 3) in which the half-moon type accessory 1060 is returned to the origin (that is, operation scenario 3), the half-moon type accessory return process is executed (S1232), and the process proceeds to S1233. And move the process.

On the other hand, if the read scenario is neither the origin return of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (operation scenario 2) nor the origin return of the half-moon type accessory 1060 (operation scenario 3) (S1228: No, S1229: No), the reading is performed. Since it means that the operation scenario is a scenario (operation scenario 1) showing the return operation of the hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940, the hemispherical accessory return process is performed (S1230), and the process is performed to S1233. Transition. In the subsequent processing of S1233, the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to ON (S1233), and the processing shifts to S1221. After that, each process of S1221 to S1233 and each process of S1234 to S1241 described later are repeated until the END information is read from the origin return operation table 222f.

In the process of S1221, if it is determined that the operation scenario execution flag 223n is on (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether or not the initial operation flag 223o is on (S1234), and if it is on (S1234: Yes), it means that the origin return of the accessory belonging to the group 1 is being executed, so it is determined whether the origin sensor corresponding to the accessory of the group 1 is on (S1235). Then, when it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S1235: Yes), the stop of the accessory motor 229 corresponding to the origin sensor that has detected the on is set (S1336), and the stopped accessory is supported. The origin position is set by setting the step counter to 0 (S1337). Then, if it is determined whether or not the home return of all the accessories belonging to the group 1 has been completed (S1338), and if it is determined that the home return has been completed (S1338: Yes), the initial operation flag 223o is set to off. (S1239), the process shifts to S1240. On the other hand, if any of the accessories in group 1 is returning to the origin (S1338: No), the process of S1239 is skipped and the process shifts to S1240.

Further, when the initial operation flag 223o is off in the processing of S1234, it indicates that it is out of the period for executing the origin return for group 1, so the processing of S1235-S1239 is skipped and the processing is sent to S1240. And migrate. Further, in the processing of S1235, when it is determined that the origin sensor corresponding to any of the accessories in group 1 is off (S1235: No), the position is located outside the origin in the accessories belonging to group 1. Since it means that there is a certain accessory (returning to the origin has not been completed yet), the processing of S1236 to S1239 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1240.

In the processing of S1240, it is determined whether or not the operation of group 2 is completed (S1240), and if it is completed (S1240: Yes), the operation scenario execution flag 223n is set to off (S1241) and the processing is performed in S1221. Move to. If the operation of group 2 is not completed (S1240: No), the process shifts to S1221.

By executing this process, the origin return operation of the group 1 accessory can be performed, and the origin return operation of each group 2 accessory can be performed in parallel, so that the period required for the origin return can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the hemispherical accessory return process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this hemispherical accessory return process. This hemispherical accessory return process is a process for returning each hemispherical accessory 910, 920, 930, 940 to the origin. In this embodiment, the origin position is in the closed state shown in FIG. 71 (d).

In this hemispherical accessory restoration process (see FIG. 95), roughly two processes are executed. That is, after executing the process of returning the opening / closing part to the position shown in FIG. 71 (c) (detection start position of the shading sensor) (S4401 to S4411), the opening / closing part is set to the origin position starting from the arrangement of FIG. The process of returning to (the position where the opening / closing part is completely closed, see FIG. 71 (d)) (origin position setting process) is executed. These processes will be specifically described.

In the hemispherical accessory return process, first, it is determined whether or not the light-shielding sensor is on (S4401). That is, it is determined whether or not the hemispherical accessory to be set is within 5 steps from the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)). Then, when it is determined that the light-shielding sensor is on (S4401: Yes), then, an operation command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the forward direction (direction in which the opening / closing part is opened) for one step is issued. , It is output to the motor driver that drives the accessory motor 229. Then, it waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4403: No). That is, it waits until the set operation for one step is completed. Then, when the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4404: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the output of the shading sensor is L (off) (S4404). That is, by operating the accessory motor 229 in one step, it is determined whether or not the state is more open than the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c). The reason why the opening / closing part is opened until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off) is that the position of the opening / closing part cannot be accurately determined while the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on). be. Therefore, the opening / closing portion is configured to retract (open operation) out of the range in which the light-shielding sensor is H (on). Once the output of the light-shielding sensor is operated to the position where it becomes L (off), the position where the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) due to the closing operation is always the position shown in FIG. 71 (c). , The opening / closing part can be changed exactly to the position shown in FIG. 71 (c).

If it is determined by the processing of S4404 that the output of the shading sensor is H (on) (S4404: No), the processing is shifted to S4402, and thereafter, until the output of the shading sensor becomes L (off), S4402 Each process of ~ S4404 is repeated. When it is determined by the processing of S4404 that the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) (S4405: Yes), it means that the output of the light-shielding sensor is open from the output start position. , The process of returning to the position of FIG. 71 (c), which is the detection start position of the sensor, is executed in order to set the exact number of steps until closing.

Specifically, first, an operation command is set so as to operate for one step in the negative direction (direction in which the opening / closing portion is closed) (S4406). Then, it waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4406: No), and when the execution signal is received (S4406: Yes), it means that the accessory motor 229 has operated one step. It is determined whether or not the output of the shading sensor is H (ON) (S4407). That is, it is determined whether or not the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 71 (c), which is the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor. Then, if the output of the light-shielding sensor remains in the H (on) state (S4407: No), the processes of S4405 to S4407 are repeated until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off).

In the process of S4407, when it is determined that the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (ON) (S4407: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor has been reached, the origin position setting process is executed. Then (S4408), this process is terminated. This origin position setting process is a process of setting the opening / closing portion to the closed state, which is the origin position of this modification, and setting the origin position in the step counter. The details of this origin position setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

In the process of S4401, when it is determined that the shading sensor is not on (that is, it is off) (S4401: No), then a command for operating the accessory motor 229 in the negative direction by one step is given to the motor driver. Set (S4409). Then, it waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4410), and when it is determined that the execution signal has been received from the motor driver (that is, the accessory motor 229 has operated one step) (S4410: Yes). Next, it is determined whether the output of the shading sensor is H (ON) (S4411).

In the process of S4411, when the light-shielding sensor determines that it is L (off) (S4411: No), the processes of S4409 to S4411 are repeated until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on). That is, the accessory motor 229 is operated step by step until the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c) is reached. Then, when the output of the shading sensor becomes H (ON) (S4411: Yes), the origin position setting process (S4408) is executed to end this process.

In this way, in this process, when the opening / closing part is out of the detection range of the light-shielding sensor when the power is turned on, the opening / closing part is closed step by step until the light-shielding sensor detects H (ON). Therefore, it can always be stopped at the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c). If the opening / closing part is within the detection range of the light-shielding sensor when the power is turned on, the opening / closing part is opened step by step until the light-shielding sensor detects L (off), and the opening / closing part is temporarily closed by the light-shielding sensor. It is configured to operate outside the detection range of. Then, as in the case of the home return operation when the sensor detects L (off) when the power is turned on, the opening / closing portion is closed step by step, so that the sensor stops at the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c) in this case as well. Can be done. Therefore, by operating the same number of steps (5 steps in the direction of closing the opening / closing portion) in the subsequent processing, it is possible to accurately return to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the origin position setting process (S4408), which is one of the above-mentioned hemispherical accessory return processes, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this origin position setting process (S4408).

In this origin position setting process (S4408), first, the value of the step counter of the hemispherical accessory is set to 5 (S4501), and then a command to operate only 5 steps in the negative direction (direction to close the opening / closing part) is issued. Output to the motor driver (S4502). As a result, the arrangement can be changed from the arrangement shown in FIG. 71 (c) to the closed position (see FIG. 71 (d)) at the position operated by only 5 steps. When the processing of S4502 is completed, the process waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: No), and when the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4503: Yes), then the hemispherical accessory step. The counter is subtracted by 1 (S4504). As a result, the number of remaining operation steps and the step counter value can be matched.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter is 0 (S4505), and if it is determined that the value is not 0, the processes of S4503 to S4505 are repeated until the value of the step counter becomes 0. Then, when the value of the step counter becomes 0 (that is, when the closed state is the origin position), the stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set to operate the accessory motor 229. It is stopped (S4506), and this process is terminated. By setting this stop command, the accessory motor 229 can be reliably stopped at the origin position without operating too much.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a claw-shaped accessory returning process for returning the claw-shaped accessory 1063 to the origin will be described. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4601), and if the origin sensor is off (S4601: No), the accessory motor 229 is only one step in the negative direction (origin direction). Set an operation command to move the (S4602). Next, it waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4603: No), and when the execution signal is received (S4603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 is on. (S4604). Then, if the origin sensor is off (S4604: No), the processes of S4602 to S4603 are repeated until the original sensor detects that it is on.

When it is detected that the origin sensor is ON in the process of S4601 or S4604, the process shifts to S4605. In the process of S4605, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the claw-shaped accessory 1063 (S4605), the stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set (S4606), and this process is terminated. By executing this process, the claw-shaped accessory 1063 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a half-moon type return process (S1232), which is a process for returning the half-moon type accessory 1060 to the origin, will be described. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4701), and if the origin sensor is off (S4701: No), the accessory motor 229 is only one step in the negative direction (origin direction). Set the operation command to move (S4702). Next, it waits until the execution signal is received from the motor driver (S4703: No), and when the execution signal is received (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor of the half-moon type accessory 1060 is on. (S4704). Then, if the origin sensor is off (S4704: No), the processes of S4702 to S4703 are repeated until the origin sensor detects that it is on.

When it is detected that the origin sensor is on in the process of S4701 or S4704, the process shifts to S4705. In the process of S4705, 0 is set to the value of the step counter of the half-moon type accessory 1060 (S4705), the stop control command of the accessory motor 229 is set (S4706), and this process is terminated. By executing this process, the half-moon type accessory 1060 can be accurately returned to the origin position.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the accessory of group 1 and the accessory of group 2 can be operated in parallel to return to the origin. Further, in this modification, when the opening / closing portion of the hemispherical accessory is returned to the origin, the operation direction when the origin return operation is performed is different depending on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor when the power is turned on. Then, in either case, after the motor is always operated at the position shown in FIG. 71 (c), the accessory motor 229 can be set to the closed origin position by setting the operation in five steps. That is, before operating to the origin position, it is possible to determine where the origin position is based on the detection result of the shading sensor and set the number of operation steps corresponding to the origin position. Therefore, even if the origin position is not the detection start position of the shading sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)), the origin can be accurately returned to the origin. By configuring the origin position to be determined starting from the detection start position of the light-shielding sensor (see FIG. 71 (c)) in this way, a large-scale circuit such as providing an origin sensor separately from the light-shielding sensor is invited. The opening / closing part can be surely returned to the origin position without doing so.

In this modification, the output of the light-shielding sensor is in the H state from the state in which the opening / closing portions of the hemispherical accessories 910, 920, 930, and 940 are closed to the origin position shown in FIG. 71 (c). The position of the shading sensor is set as described above, but the position is not limited to this. For example, in the open state and the closed state, the light-shielding sensor is in the L output state and is in the process of transitioning from the closed state to the open state (in the process of transitioning from the open state to the closed state). The light-shielding sensor may be configured to be in the H output state at the position of. In this case, when returning to the origin, the boundary position where the output of the shading sensor switches from L (off) to H (on) is searched for by alternately operating the open side and the closed side, and the boundary is found. The number of steps from the position to the closed position may be set and operated to return to the origin position.

In order to explain more specifically, a case where the opening / closing portion is arranged so that the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H within the range of the 5th step to the 10th step from the origin position will be described as an example. First, when the output of the light-shielding sensor is H (on) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the opening / closing part is closed step by step until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off) (origin position). (Variable in the direction), when the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes L (off), then the open operation is performed until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on). As a result, the opening / closing part can be operated at the position of the fifth step from the origin position, so that the opening / closing part can be easily returned to the origin position by setting the opening / closing part to operate five steps in the direction of the origin position. ..

On the other hand, if the output of the light-shielding sensor is L (off) when the power is turned on, the opening operation and the closing operation are repeated, and the number of operation steps of one opening operation or closing operation is gradually increased. By going, the position where the output of the shading sensor becomes H (on) is searched. For example, if the light-shielding sensor output remains L (off) after opening only one step at first, then the opening / closing part is returned to the original position (the position when the power is turned on) and then one step. Close the operation for the minute. Then, if the output of the light-shielding sensor remains L (off), the opening / closing part is returned to the original position (the position when the power is turned on), and then the opening / closing is performed in two steps starting from the original position. The operation and the two-step closing operation are performed. Then, the number of operation steps from the original position is increased until the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on), and the opening operation and the closing operation are alternately repeated. By searching for the detection position of the light-shielding sensor while increasing the amplitude step by step, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing portion from being excessively opened or closed when the opening / closing portion is operated in the direction opposite to the origin position.

When the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the opening operation, it means that the opening / closing part is opened from the origin position to the position of the fifth step and is within the detection range of the light-shielding sensor. Therefore, the opening / closing portion can be returned to the origin position by setting the closing operation in 5 steps. On the other hand, when the output of the light-shielding sensor becomes H (on) during the closing operation, it means that the opening / closing part is closed from the origin position to the position of the 10th step and is within the detection range of the light-shielding sensor. Therefore, the opening / closing portion can be returned to the origin position by setting the closing operation in 10 steps.

In this way, even if the origin position does not exist within the detection range of the light-shielding sensor, if the number of steps from the detection range of the light-shielding sensor to the origin position is known, the opening / closing part can be opened based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor. It can be easily returned to the origin position. In the above specific example, when the light-shielding sensor is L (off) when the power is turned on, an example in which the amplitude of the closing operation and the opening operation is increased in 1-step increments has been described, but the amplitude increase range is 2. It may be a step or 5 steps. As the number of steps is increased, the period until the opening / closing portion enters the detection range of the shading sensor can be shortened, so that the time required for returning to the origin can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a drive load reference value is defined for each type of accessory, and it is determined whether or not to cancel the operation of the accessory based on the drive load reference value, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, it may be determined whether or not to cancel the operation of the accessory based on the number of the accessory motors 229 to be operated, the number of commands for operating the accessory, the voltage value, and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the operation of each accessory is set (driving the accessory motor 229) by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the accessory is set by the MPU 110 of the main control device 110. It may be configured to control the operation. That is, the accessory motor 229 may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control device 110. Further, in the second embodiment, the brightness of the LCD backlight 230 is controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, but it may be controlled by the MPU 110 of the main control device 110. .. That is, the LCD backlight 230 may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control device 110. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, a liquid crystal display is adopted as the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a PDP (plasma display panel), an organic EL display, a cathode ray tube display, or the like may be adopted. Since these are self-luminous displays and do not include a backlight in the configuration, when reducing the brightness as in the second embodiment, the light emitting element itself is controlled to reduce the brightness of the display. Therefore, the load current (power consumption) may be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, only one third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display) is provided, but a plurality of third symbol display devices 81 may be provided. For example, two types, a main display and a sub-display whose screen size is smaller than that of the main display, may be provided. As a result, the degree of freedom in the display effect is further increased, so that the effect can be further enhanced. Further, for example, the position of the sub-display may be made variable. Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the current capacity (rated power) is exceeded by operating the accessory, the display effect is executed only on the sub display and the main display is turned off to perform the main display. The load current (power consumption) supplied to the display may be reduced to be within the range of the current capacity (rated power). Further, when the main display is turned off, the position of the sub display may be changed so that the sub display is arranged at the position of the main display. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the main display is turned off and to make the player recognize it as a kind of production.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not backed up, but while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power is supplied and after the power is cut off. May be configured so that the stored contents can be retained. As a result, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time when the power is turned off can be determined after the power is turned on, and the production can be executed continuously, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (A limit is set on the total value of the drive current of the accessory motor)
A power supply means for supplying electric power, a plurality of variable means driven based on the power supplied by the power supply means, a plurality of variable members variable by the variable means, and at least one of the plurality of variable members. When the unit is changed, the power discriminating means for determining whether or not the power required to drive the corresponding variable means exceeds the predetermined power, and the power discriminating means exceed the predetermined power. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by including the variable means being driven and a drive suppressing means for suppressing driving of at least a part of the variable means to be newly driven when the determination is made.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable means are driven based on the electric power supplied by the power supply means, and the plurality of variable members are variable by the variable means. When at least a part of the plurality of variable members is variable, it is determined by the power determining means whether or not the electric power required to drive the corresponding variable means exceeds a predetermined electric power. Then, when it is determined by the power discriminating means that the power exceeds a predetermined power, at least a part of the driving variable means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed by the drive suppressing means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric power from being excessively increased by driving the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable means can be preferably operated.

In the game machine A1, a storage means for storing electric power information which is information according to electric power for driving each variable means, and all the variable to be driven based on the electric power information stored in the storage means. The electric power discriminating means includes a calculation means for calculating a total electric power value which is a value corresponding to the total electric power of the means, and the electric power discriminating means receives the electric power required to drive the variable means based on the total electric power value in advance. A game machine A2 characterized in that it determines whether or not it exceeds a predetermined electric power.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the power information, which is the information corresponding to the power for driving each variable means, is stored in the storage means, and the total power of all the variable means to be driven is based on the power information stored in the storage means. The total power value, which is a value corresponding to the value, is calculated by the calculation means. Based on the total power value, the power discriminating means determines whether or not the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power.

As a result, when calculating the total power value corresponding to the total value of the power supplied to the variable means to be driven, it is sufficient to simply read out the power information stored in the storage means and add up the current value and the voltage value. Since it is not necessary to actually measure the power, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the circuit scale of the game machine.

The game machine A2 includes a drive power storage means for storing a value corresponding to the total value of the electric power of the variable means being driven, and the calculation means newly drives the value stored in the drive power storage means. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the total power value is calculated based on the power information corresponding to the variable means to be made to be operated.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a value corresponding to the total power of the variable means being driven is stored in the drive power storage means, and the value stored in the drive power storage means and the power information corresponding to the newly driven variable means are stored. Based on this, the total power value is calculated by the calculation means.

As a result, only the power information corresponding to the newly driven variable means needs to be read from the storage means, and each time the variable means is newly driven, the power information of all the variable means being driven needs to be read from the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the load of the calculation process in the calculation means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the drive suppressing means newly drives the drive suppressing means when it is determined by the power determining means that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds the predetermined power. The gaming machine A4, which suppresses the driving of the variable means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when it is determined by the power discriminating means that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power, a new power is newly determined. Since the driving of the variable means to be driven is suppressed by the drive suppressing means, it is possible to prevent the variable member from stopping in the middle of the operation by stopping the variable means being driven. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a trouble has occurred in the gaming machine due to the variable member stopping in the middle of the operation.

In the game machine A4, the storage control means that controls the total power value calculated by the calculation means to be stored in the drive power storage means, and the power required to drive the variable means by the power determination means. It is characterized by including a storage control suppressing means for suppressing the control of the total power value to be stored in the driving power storage means by the storage control means when it is determined that the power exceeds the predetermined power. Game machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the total power value calculated by the calculation means is controlled by the storage control means so as to be stored in the drive power storage means. When the power determination means determines that the power required to drive the variable means exceeds a predetermined power, the storage control means controls the total power value so as to be stored in the drive power storage means. It is suppressed by the suppressing means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the power information corresponding to the variable means whose driving is suppressed from being added to the total power value, so that it is wasteful to subtract the power information once added to the total power value. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of various processes. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a display means for displaying the display effect and a display control means for controlling the display content to be displayed on the display means are provided, and the display control means is being driven by the drive suppression means. When the drive of a part or all of the variable means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed, the display means is controlled to display an effect corresponding to the variable means whose drive is suppressed. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being possible.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content to be displayed by the display means is controlled by the display control means. When the drive of a part or all of the variable means being driven by the drive control means and the newly driven variable means is suppressed, the display means is displayed with the effect corresponding to the variable means whose drive is suppressed. It is controlled by the display control means.

As a result, even if the drive of the variable means is suppressed, the corresponding effect is displayed on the display means, so that there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the drive of the variable means is suppressed. ..

In the gaming machine A1, the power determination means determines whether or not the power exceeds a predetermined threshold value based on the number of the variable means being driven and the variable means to be newly driven. The gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, it is determined by the power determining means whether or not the threshold value exceeds a predetermined threshold based on the number of the variable means being driven and the number of the variable means to be newly driven. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the power exceeds a predetermined value by a simple process of counting the number of variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the discrimination process by the power discrimination means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A1, the drive suppressing means causes at least two or more specific variable means among the driven variable means and the newly driven variable means to repeat variable operation and operation stop, and at least one. By variably operating the other specific variable means during the period in which the specific variable means is stopped, the power required to drive the variable means is suppressed to a predetermined power or less. The gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least two or more specific variable means among the driving variable means and the newly driven variable means repeat the variable operation and the operation stop by the drive suppressing means. Then, while at least one specific variable means is stopped, the other specific variable means is variably operated by the drive suppressing means.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize that all the variable means including the specific variable means are operating without being stopped, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the operation of the variable means. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

<Characteristic B group> (Reduces the power of the backlight to secure the power for operating the accessory)
The brightness of the control means for controlling the game, the display means for displaying the display information, and the brightness of the display means can be changed to at least a first brightness and a second brightness darker than the first brightness. The luminance variable means is characterized in that the luminance of the display means can be changed to the second luminance when a condition for executing a specific control is satisfied by the controlling means. Game machine B1 to play.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the number of variable members is increased in order to enhance the effect of the effect, there is a risk that the process for operating the variable members cannot be performed normally. That is, there is a risk that it will be difficult to suitably control the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the control means controls the gaming. The display information is displayed by the display means, and the brightness of the display means is at least variable to a first brightness and a second brightness darker than the first brightness by the brightness variable means. When the condition for executing a specific control is satisfied by the control means, the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness variable means.

As a result, even if the power required for the control is increased by performing the specific control, it can be offset by the reduced power by changing the display means to the second brightness, so that the specific control can be surely executed. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be preferably controlled.

In the game machine B1, the power supply means for supplying power to the control means and the display means, and the power determination means for determining whether or not the power supplied by the power supply means exceeds a predetermined power. When the power discriminating means determines that the power exceeding the predetermined power is exceeded by the control means executing the specific control, the brightness variable means determines the brightness of the display means. A game machine B2 characterized in that it can be changed to a second brightness.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, power is supplied to the control means and the display means by the power supply means, and it is determined by the power determination means whether or not the power supplied by the power supply means exceeds a predetermined power. When the power discriminating means determines that the power exceeds a predetermined power by executing a specific control by the control means, the luminance variable means changes the luminance of the display means to the second luminance.

As a result, even if a specific control is executed, the electric power can be set to be equal to or less than a predetermined electric power. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the gaming machine from occurring due to exceeding a predetermined electric power.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a plurality of variable members that can be changed, and the specific control is a control for changing a part or all of the plurality of variable members.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the specific control is a control for changing a part or all of a plurality of variable members, a large number of controls are used to improve the effect. Even if the variable member is mounted, there is an effect that the electric power can be set to be less than or equal to the predetermined electric power when the variable member is variable.

In the gaming machine B3, when performing control for changing a part or all of the plurality of variable members, a control suppressing means capable of suppressing control for changing at least a part of the variable members is provided. The control suppressing means is at least partially when it is determined by the power determining means that the brightness of the display means exceeds the predetermined power even after the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness adjusting means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the power is reduced to or less than the predetermined power by suppressing the control for changing the variable member of the above.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the control for changing a part or all of the plurality of variable members is executed, the control for changing at least a part of the variable members is suppressed by the control suppressing means. Even after the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness variable means, if it is determined by the power determination means that the power exceeds a predetermined power, control for changing at least a part of the variable members is controlled. It is suppressed by the suppressing means.

As a result, even if a brighter brightness is set as the second brightness, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be operated so as not to exceed a predetermined power by being controlled by the control suppressing means.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform a power-on operation, which is a predetermined operation, based on the power-on, and the brightness variable means controls the power-on. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the control means controls the plurality of variable members to perform the on operation, which is a predetermined operation, based on the power on. The brightness of the display means is changed to the second brightness by the brightness variable means based on the power-on.

As a result, since the second brightness is set during the closing operation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the power from exceeding a predetermined power during the closing operation.

A gaming machine B6, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the luminance variable means changes the luminance of the display means to the first luminance after the specific control is completed.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the brightness of the display means is changed to the first brightness by the brightness changing means after the specific control is completed. The period set for brightness can be set as the minimum period. Therefore, since the brightness of the display means can be set to the first brightness which is brighter than the second brightness for a longer period of time, the appearance quality of the display means can be improved.

In the gaming machine B6, the brightness variable means increases the brightness according to the elapsed time after the specific control is completed, so that the brightness of the display means is reduced by the time when a predetermined time elapses. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that it is variable in brightness.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, after the specific control is completed, the brightness is increased according to the elapsed time by the brightness variable means, and the display means of the display means by the time the predetermined time elapses. Since the brightness is changed to the first brightness, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the brightness as compared with the case where the switching from the second brightness to the first brightness is instantaneously executed. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the change in the brightness from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the display means.

A feature of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7 is that when the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness variable means, a display control means capable of controlling the display of a black image on the entire display means is provided. Game machine B8 to play.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of B1 to B7, when the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness variable means, the display control means controls so that a black image is displayed on the entire display means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the brightness is variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the change in the brightness from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the display means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the display means includes a display panel and a light source that illuminates the display panel, and the brightness variable means PWMs the brightness of the light source. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that it is variable by control.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means includes a display panel and a light source that illuminates the display panel. The brightness of the light source is changed by PWM control by the brightness variable means.

As a result, the brightness can be changed by a simple control of repeatedly turning the light source on and off. Therefore, since a simple circuit can be adopted as the circuit for executing the control of the light source, there is an effect that the cost can be reduced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, the display means is configured to include a display panel and a light source composed of LEDs that illuminate the display panel, and the brightness variable means is the said. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the brightness of the light source is changed by changing the driving current of the LED.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means includes a display panel and a light source composed of LEDs that illuminate the display panel. By changing the drive current of the LED, the brightness of the light source is changed by the brightness changing means.

As a result, when the brightness is lowered to the same brightness as the PWM control, the anode voltage of the LED can be reduced as the driving current of the LED is reduced, so that the power of the light source can be further reduced as compared with the PWM control. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the energy saving of the gaming machine can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the luminance variable means is configured to include a plurality of region luminance variable means for varying the luminance of a part of the display means, and the plurality of variable members. Includes a specific variable member that shields a part of the display means by changing to the front side of the display means with respect to the gaming board when the value is changed based on the control by the control means. The brightness variable means changes the brightness of a region partially or wholly shielded by the specific variable member to the second brightness by the corresponding region brightness variable means when the specific variable member is variable. The gaming machine B11 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the luminance variable means is provided with a plurality of regional luminance variable means for varying the luminance of a part of the display means. The plurality of variable members include a specific variable member in which a part of the display means is shielded by changing to the front side of the display means with respect to the game board when the variable member is changed based on the control by the control means. When the specific variable member is variable, the brightness of a region partially or wholly shielded by the specific variable member is changed to a second brightness by the corresponding region brightness variable means.

As a result, only the brightness of the region that is shielded by the specific variable member and cannot be seen by the player is set as the second brightness, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the brightness has changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the change in the brightness from feeling uncomfortable with the appearance of the display means.

<Characteristic C group> (The accessory is divided into a group in which the accessory interferes with each other and a group in which the accessory does not interfere with each other, and the motor for the accessory is controlled according to the group).
The variable member is made variable, a first member group composed of one or a plurality of variable members, a second member group composed of one or a plurality of the variable members different from the first member group, and the variable member. The variable member including the variable means capable of capable of forming the first member group is arranged at a position where the variable member does not interfere with other variable members by being variable, and the second member group is provided. At least two of the variable members constituting the second member group are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by varying, and the variable means is previously used when the variable members constituting the second member group are variable. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is variable according to a predetermined operating condition.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes accessories that are operated by motors and the like. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of production operations by operating a plurality of accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately.

According to the gaming machine C1, the first member group is composed of one or a plurality of variable members that can be changed, and the second member group is composed of one or a plurality of variable members different from the first member group. The variable member is variable by variable means. The variable members constituting the first member group are arranged at positions that do not interfere with other variable members due to being variable. At least two variable members constituting the second member group are arranged at positions where they can interfere with each other by being variable. When the variable members constituting the second member group are variable by the variable means, the variable members are variable according to predetermined operating conditions.

As a result, the operating conditions for the variable members constituting the second member group may be specified, and the specified operating conditions can be minimized. That is, the process for changing the variable member can be simplified. Therefore, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably changed.

In the gaming machine C1, the operating condition includes a position where the other variable members constituting the second member group do not interfere with each other as a condition for varying the variable member constituting the second member group. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the condition for making the variable member variable is included in the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, other variable members constituting the second member group are included in the operating conditions as a condition for varying the variable members constituting the second member group. Since the condition that the variable member can be changed is included when the variable member is in a position where it does not interfere with each other, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the variable members constituting the second member group from interfering with each other.

In the gaming machine C2, the operating conditions are defined when the variable member is changed based on the specified information by the specified information storage means for storing the specified information in which the type of the variable member to be changed is specified for each effect. The variable member specified in the specified information by the variable means when the condition determining means for determining whether or not is satisfied and the operating condition are determined not to be satisfied by the condition determining means. The gaming machine C3 is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding the variation of the above.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specified information in which the type of the variable member to be changed is specified for each effect is stored in the specified information storage means. When the variable member is changed based on the specified information by the variable means, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not the operating condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the condition determining means that the operating condition is not satisfied, the variable member avoids the variable of the variable member specified in the specified information by the variable means.

As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the variable members from interfering with each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as damage to the variable member due to interference.

The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C3, the type of the variable means to be changed in association with the elapsed time from the start of the effect is defined in the specified information.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the specified information defines the type of variable means to be changed in association with the elapsed time from the start of the production, so that the variable means can be changed according to the specified information. The variable means can be changed according to the effect by a simple process of selecting the type of means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specified information is characterized in that information indicating whether or not the variable member belonging to the second member group is included in the variable member to be changed is specified. The gaming machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specified information defines information indicating whether or not the variable member belonging to the second member group is included in the variable member to be changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is necessary to refer to the operating conditions. Therefore, even when the variable member belonging to the second member group is specified in the specified information, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing of comparing each accessory with the operating conditions from being executed. There is an effect that the processing load for changing the variable means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the display means for displaying the display effect and the display control means for controlling the display content to be displayed on the display means are provided, and the display control means is provided with the specified information by the avoidance means. The game is characterized in that when the variation of the variable member specified in the above is avoided, the display means can be controlled to display an effect corresponding to the variable means in which the variation is avoided. Machine C6.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display effect is displayed by the display means, and the display content to be displayed by the display means is controlled by the display control means. When the variable member specified in the specified information is avoided by the avoiding means, the display control means is controlled to display the effect corresponding to the variable means in which the variable is avoided on the display means.

As a result, even if the variable member is avoided from being changed, it is possible to suppress an unnatural effect by displaying the corresponding effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the production.

<Feature D group> (Return processing at power-on is executed based on the detection result of the light-shielding sensor)
A variable member that can be changed, a variable means that changes the variable member, and a closing control means that controls the variable means so that the variable member performs a closing operation that is a predetermined operation based on power-on. A discriminating means for determining whether or not the variable member is located within the operation start range, which is a predetermined operating range for starting the closing operation, and the variable member by the discriminating means when the power is turned on. It is characterized by including a return operation executing means for executing a return operation for operating the variable means so as to be located within the operation start range when it is determined that the device is not located within the operation start range. Game machine D1.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that it becomes difficult to appropriately set the operation of the variable member due to the diversification of the variable member.

According to the gaming machine D1, the variable member is variable by the variable means. The variable means is controlled by the turn-on control means so that the variable member performs a turn-on operation which is a predetermined operation based on the power-on. Whether or not the variable member is located within the operation start range, which is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation, is determined by the determination means. When the determination means determines that the variable member is not within the operation start range when the power is turned on, the return operation execution means operates the variable means so that the variable member is located within the operation start range. Will be executed.

As a result, the variable means is operated within the operation start range by the return operation based on the power-on, so that the power-on operation can be preferably performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the accessory can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine D1, the return operation executing means is located within the operation start range from a position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination means. The gaming machine D2, characterized in that the return operation is terminated when the position is changed to a position determined to be.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the variable member is located within the operation starting range from the position where it is determined that the variable member is not located within the operation starting range based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means. When the position is changed to the position determined to be, the return operation is terminated by the return operation execution means. Therefore, if the position is not within the operation start range when the power is turned on, the position is changed to the closest position in the operation start range. The return operation can be terminated when the member operates. Therefore, there is an effect that the return operation can be completed in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine D2, the variable means can bidirectionally change the variable member between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Specific range determination for determining whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operating range including at least the first position, which is a predetermined operating range between the first position and the second position. The operation start range includes means, and the operation start range is an operation range included in the specific operation range, and includes the end of the specific operation range on the second position side. When the variable member is determined to be located within the specific operation range by the specific range determination means, the variable member is operated to the second position side as the return operation to determine the specific range. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined by means that the variable member is not located within the specific operating range, the variable member is operated to the first position side as the return operation. D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, the variable member is bidirectionally variable between the first position and a second position different from the first position by the variable means. Whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operating range including at least the first position within a predetermined operating range between the first position and the second position is determined by the specific range determining means. NS. The operation start range is included in the specific operation range, and the end on the second position side of the specific operation range is included in the operation start range. When the variable member is determined to be located within the specific operation range by the specific range determining means, the variable member is operated to the second position side by the return operation executing means as the return operation. Further, when the variable member is located within the specific operation range and is determined to be within the specific operation range by the specific range determining means, the variable member is operated to the first position by the return operation executing means as the return operation.

As a result, it is possible to know whether the operation start range is on the first position side or the second position side based on the determination result by the specific range determination means. Therefore, in the return operation, the direction is opposite to the operation start range. There is an effect that the variable member can be operated efficiently without operating the variable member.

In the game machine D3, the game machine D4 is characterized in that the operation start range is the end of the specific operation range on the second position side.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, since the operation start range is the end on the second position side of the specific operation range, the second position side as the closing operation executed by the return operation executing means. It is only necessary to specify the operation starting from the end of. Therefore, there is an effect that the storage capacity for defining the closing operation can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, when the closing operation is performed, the abnormality determining means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member and the abnormality determining means determine that there is an abnormality. The gaming machine D5 is provided with a notification means for executing a predetermined notification operation when the notification is performed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the closing operation is performed, whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member is determined by the abnormality determining means, and when the abnormality determining means determines that there is an abnormality, a predetermined notification operation is notified. Performed by means.

This has the effect that the abnormality can be eliminated based on the notification by the notification means.

The gaming machine D5 includes a specific means for identifying the type of the variable member having an abnormality in the operation when the abnormality determining means determines that the operation of the variable member is abnormal. The gaming machine D6, characterized in that it executes a notification operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specific means.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality in the operation of the variable member, the type of the variable member having an abnormality in the operation is specified by the specifying means. The notification operation corresponding to the type of the variable member specified by the specific means is executed by the notification means.

As a result, the type of the variable member can be easily recognized by the notification operation, so that there is an effect that the abnormality can be resolved more quickly.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a period determining means for determining whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the returning operation by the returning operation executing means is completed is provided, and the closing control means is provided by the period determining means. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to perform the closing operation when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period determination means determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the return operation by the return operation execution means is completed, and when the period determination means determines that the predetermined period has elapsed, the input operation is performed. The variable means is controlled by the closing control means.

As a result, the variable member can be kept within the operation start range for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, when it is necessary to shut off the power supply while the variable member is within the operation start range in shipping inspection or the like. The inspector can be turned off during this predetermined period. That is, it is not necessary to wait until the closing operation is completed each time the inspection is performed, or the inspector does not have to manually operate the variable member until the variable member is within the operation start range after the power is cut off, so that the inspection efficiency is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic E group> (The timing of turning off the eyeball-shaped accessory is determined based on the detection result of the sensor)
An effect display unit that can change the effect mode and an opening / closing operation that can be opened and closed on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the game board are arranged so that the effect display unit is exposed as it is opened. An opening / closing display means having a portion, an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode to at least a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect, and an opening / closing operation of the opening / closing unit. The opening / closing control means for controlling and the position where the opening / closing portion can be taken between the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing portion and the time when the opening / closing portion is completely closed, and a part of the effect display portion is from the opening / closing member. The effect mode setting means is provided with a discriminating means for determining whether or not the position is a specific open position, which is an exposed position, and the effect mode setting unit is the discriminating means when the effect display unit is set to the first aspect. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect display unit is set in the second aspect based on the determination that the opening / closing unit has reached the specific open position.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes variable means operated by a motor or the like. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of the variable means, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to appropriately execute the effect in the variable means having a complicated configuration.

According to the gaming machine E1, an effect display unit that can change the effect mode and an effect display unit that can be opened and closed on the front side of the effect display unit with respect to the game board are installed so that the effect display unit is exposed as it is opened. The opening / closing unit is provided in the opening / closing display means. The effect mode is set at least in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode by the effect mode setting means. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing part is controlled by the opening / closing control means, and a part of the effect display part is an opening / closing member at a position where the opening / closing part can be taken from the start of the closing operation of the opening / closing part to the time when the opening / closing part is completely closed. It is determined by the determining means whether or not it has reached the specific open position, which is the position exposed from. When the effect display unit is set to the first aspect, the effect display unit is set to the second aspect by the effect mode setting means based on the determination that the opening / closing unit has reached the specific open position by the determination means. Set.

Thereby, the second aspect can be set before the opening / closing part is completely closed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

The gaming machine E1 includes a detecting means for detecting whether or not the degree of opening of the opening / closing portion is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position, and the discriminating means is said based on the detection result by the detecting means. The gaming machine E2 characterized in that it determines whether or not it has reached a specific open position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the degree of opening of the opening / closing portion is equal to or less than the degree of opening at the specific opening position is detected by the detecting means, and whether or not the opening / closing position is reached based on the detection result by the detecting means is determined by the determining means. It is determined.

As a result, the degree of opening can be determined only by the detection result of the detection result, so that the determination by the determination means can be further simplified. That is, when determining the degree of opening / closing of the opening / closing portion, it is not necessary to make a prediction according to the setting of the opening / closing operation such as the opening / closing speed and the elapsed time from the start of opening / closing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for discrimination by the discrimination means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect mode setting means sets the brightness of the effect display unit to the first brightness as the first aspect, and the effect display as the second aspect. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the brightness of the unit is set to a second brightness that is darker than the first brightness.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the first aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to the first brightness by the effect mode setting means. Further, as a second aspect, the brightness of the effect display unit is set to a second brightness darker than the first brightness by the effect mode setting means.

As a result, when the opening / closing portion is closed, the second brightness, which is darker than the first brightness, can be set from the time when the opening / closing portion reaches the specific opening position until the opening / closing portion is completely closed. Therefore, since the brightness of a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made inconspicuous, there is an effect that the appearance quality of the effect display unit can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3, the second brightness is a state in which the effect display unit is turned off.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the second brightness turns off the effect display unit, so when the opening / closing unit is closed, it is completely after the opening / closing unit is in the specific opening position. By the time it is closed, a part of the effect display unit exposed from the opening / closing unit can be made less noticeable. Therefore, there is an effect that the appearance quality of the effect display unit can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the effect mode setting means determines that the opening / closing portion has reached the specific open position by the determination means when the effect mode is set to the second aspect. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the effect mode is set to the first mode based on the above.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the effect mode is set to the second mode, it is determined by the discriminating means that the opening / closing portion has reached the specific open position. Since the effect mode is set to the first aspect by the effect mode setting means based on the above, the effect mode can be switched at the same position in both the case of closing the opening / closing portion and the case of opening the opening / closing portion. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed in the open / close display means.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the open / close display means includes an abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing portion, and the effect mode setting means has an abnormality caused by the abnormality determining means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that when it is determined that it has occurred, the effect mode is set to a third mode different from both the first mode and the second mode.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the open / close display means, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the open / close portion is determined by the abnormality determination means. When it is determined by the abnormality determining means that an abnormality has occurred, the effect mode is set to a third aspect different from both the first aspect and the second aspect by the effect mode setting means.

This has the effect that the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing portion depending on whether or not the effect mode is set to the third mode.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the gaming machine E6 has a plurality of the opening / closing display means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, a plurality of opening / closing display means are provided. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the opening / closing part of some of the opening / closing display means, the third mode is set. There is an effect that an open / close display means having an open / close portion in which an abnormality has occurred can be easily identified based on whether or not the abnormality has occurred.

<Feature F group> (Reduce the peak current value by shifting the lighting timing of each LED)
A plurality of operation means, an operation control means for controlling the operation of the plurality of operation means based on the operation control data, and an operation control data for setting the operation control data for the corresponding operation means among the plurality of operation means. The operation control data setting means includes, in the operation means, a plurality of states including at least a first operation state and a second operation state whose power consumption is lower than the first operation state are the first operation. A second operation pattern controls a plurality of states including at least a first operation control data controlled by a pattern and a third operation state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state. At least the operation control data is set, and when the operation control data setting means sets the first operation control data and the second operation control data for the plurality of operation means, the operation control data is set. The gaming machine F1 is set so that there is a period in which the first operating state performed in the first operating pattern and the third operating state performed in the second operating pattern do not overlap. ..

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that includes a light emitting member that performs a light emitting operation and a production member such as a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of production operations by operating a plurality of production members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a risk that the power consumption will increase when the number of the effect members is increased.

According to the gaming machine F1, a plurality of operating means are operated and controlled by the operation control means based on the operation control data. The operation control data is set by the operation control data setting means for the corresponding operation means among the plurality of operation means. In the operating means, a first operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a first operating state and a second operating state having lower power consumption than the first operating state are controlled by the first operating pattern, and a third operating state. A second operation control data in which a plurality of states including at least a state and a fourth operation state having lower power consumption than the third operation state are controlled by the second operation pattern is at least set by the operation control data setting means. .. When the first operation control data and the second control data are set by the operation control data setting means for a plurality of operation means, the first operation state performed in the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern It is set by the operation control data setting means so that there is a period that does not overlap with the third operation state to be performed.

As a result, power consumption can be suppressed during a period in which the first operating state and the third operating state do not overlap. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption due to overlapping periods of high power consumption in each operating means.

In the gaming machine F1, the operation control data setting means is performed in the first operation pattern when the first operation control data and the second operation control data are set for the plurality of operation means. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that at least one of the first operating states and the third operating state performed in the second operating pattern are set so as not to overlap with each other.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first operation control data and the second operation control data are set by the operation control data setting means for the plurality of operation means, at least one operation state performed in the first operation pattern and the first operation state. It is set by the operation control data setting means so that the third operation state performed in the two operation patterns does not overlap.

As a result, the period during which the operating means is controlled to operate in a high power consumption operating state can be dispersed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the power consumption consumed by the operating means. ..

The game machine F2 includes display means for displaying display information, and the operation control means includes a backlight control means for lighting and controlling a backlight provided in the display means based on the operation control data, and an illumination. The lighting control means for controlling the lighting of the light source of the member based on the operation control data is provided, and the operation control data setting means transmits the first operation control data to the backlight provided in the display means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized by comprising a backlight setting means for setting and an illumination setting means for setting the second operation control data with respect to a light source of the illumination member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display information is displayed on the display means. In the operation control means, the backlight provided in the display means is turned on and controlled by the backlight control means based on the operation control data. Further, the light source of the illumination member is lit by the illumination control means based on the operation control data.

As a result, it is possible to provide a period for lighting the backlight and the light source of the illumination member so that the lighting periods do not overlap. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in power consumption during the overlapping periods due to overlapping lighting periods in the period.

In the gaming machine F3, the first operation pattern is an operation pattern in which a lighting state and an extinguishing state are repeated in the first cycle, and the second operating pattern is an operating pattern in which the lighting state and the extinguishing state are repeated in the second cycle. It is an operation pattern that repeats the state, and the operation control data setting means does not overlap the lighting state performed in the first operation pattern and the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern. The gaming machine F4, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first operation pattern, the lighting state and the extinguishing state are repeated in the first cycle. In the second operation pattern, the lighting state and the extinguishing state are repeated in the second cycle. It is controlled so that the lighting state performed in the first operation pattern and the lighting state performed in the second operation pattern do not overlap.

As a result, while one of the backlight and the illumination member is in the lit state, the other can be turned off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more effectively suppress the increase in power consumption due to the lighting state of both the backlight and the illumination member.

The game machine F4 includes an effect control means for controlling the execution of various effects of the game machine, and a display control means for controlling the display effect executed in the display means based on a command output from the effect control means. The display control means includes the backlight control means, the backlight setting means, a synchronization signal generation means for generating a synchronization signal at predetermined intervals, and an output means for outputting the synchronization signal to the effect control means. The backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal when the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means. The effect control means includes the illumination control means and the illumination setting means, and the illumination control means is set with the second operation control data by the illumination setting means. In this case, the gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the light source of the lighting member is controlled to operate in the second operation pattern based on the synchronization signal.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution of various effects of the gaming machine is controlled by the effect control means. The display control means controls the display effect executed by the display means based on the command output from the effect control means. In the display control means, the backlight control means and the backlight setting means are included in the configuration. Further, a synchronization signal is generated by the synchronization signal generation means at predetermined intervals, and the synchronization signal is output to the effect control means by the output means. When the first operation control data is set by the backlight setting means, the backlight control means controls the backlight to operate in the first operation pattern based on the synchronization signal. In the effect control means, the illumination control means and the illumination setting means are included in the configuration. When the second operation control data is set by the illumination setting means, the light source of the illumination member is controlled to operate in the second operation pattern by the illumination control means based on the synchronization signal.

As a result, the period of the lighting state and the period of the extinguishing state can be set for the backlight and the light source of the illumination member based on the same synchronization signal. , There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the overlapping of the lighting states.

In the gaming machine F5, the synchronization signal generation means generates the synchronization signal in accordance with a cycle of updating the display contents of the display means, and the display control means is the display means based on the synchronization signal. The gaming machine F6, which is provided with a display updating means for updating the display contents of the above.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a synchronization signal is generated by the synchronization signal generation means in accordance with the cycle of updating the display content of the display means. In the display control means, the display content of the display means is updated by the display update means based on the synchronization signal.

As a result, the synchronization signal required to update the display of the display means can also be used as the synchronization signal for lighting control by the backlight control means or the illumination control means, so that the number of synchronization signals can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the first operating pattern is characterized in that the period of the extinguished state is shorter than the period of the lighting state.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, in the first operating pattern, the period of the extinguished state is shorter than the period of the lighting state, so that the operating machine operates in the first operating pattern. The brightness of the backlight can be improved. That is, while suppressing the momentary increase in the drive current supplied to the light emitting means due to the overlap between the timing when the backlight is turned on and the timing when the light source of the illumination member is turned on. , There is an effect that the appearance quality of the display means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the second operation pattern is turned on after a predetermined delay period has elapsed from the end of the lighting state of the backlight operating in the first operation pattern. A gaming machine F8 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, in the second operating pattern, a predetermined delay period elapses after the lighting state of the backlight operating in the first operating pattern ends. Since the lighting state is performed after the backlight is turned on, even if there is a time lag between setting the lighting state for the backlight and turning off the backlight completely, turn off the backlight completely during the delay period. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress an increase in power consumption due to the overlapping of the lighting state of the backlight and the lighting state of the illumination member.

<Characteristic G group> (The accessory is divided into multiple groups, and the accessory motor is controlled so that each group does not interfere)
The variable member group includes a plurality of variable members and variable control means for controlling the plurality of variable members so as to be variable in units of the variable member group composed of one or the plurality of the variable members. At least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided, and at least one variable member constituting the first member group and the second member group are provided. The at least one variable member that constitutes the variable member is in a positional relationship that interferes with each other by being variable, and the variable control means constitutes the variable member group according to operating conditions determined for each variable member group. The gaming machine G1 is provided with means for variably controlling the variable member.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes accessories that are operated by motors and the like. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of production operations by operating a plurality of accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it becomes difficult to set the operation appropriately.

According to the gaming machine G1, a plurality of variable members that can be changed are controlled by variable control means so as to be variable in units of one or a plurality of variable member groups. As the variable member group, at least a first member group and a second member group different from the first member group are provided. By making the at least one variable member constituting the first member group and at least one variable member constituting the second member group variable, they are in a positional relationship of interfering with each other. The variable control means is provided with means for variably controlling the variable members constituting the variable member group according to the operating conditions determined for each variable member group.

This has the effect that each variable member group can be suitably operated based on the operating conditions.

In the gaming machine G1, when the operating conditions are such that the variable members constituting the first member group do not interfere with each other even if the second member group is changed, the second member group is set. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it includes conditions that make it variable.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the operating conditions are such that the variable members constituting the first member group do not interfere with each other even if the second member group is changed. Since the condition that the second member group can be changed is included, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the interference between the accessories.

In the gaming machine G2, the variable control means variably controls the variable member so that the variable member performs a turning-on operation, which is a predetermined operation based on the power-on. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it includes operating conditions for a closing operation.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable member is variably controlled by the variable control means so that the variable member performs a predetermined turn-on operation based on the power-on. The operating conditions include the operating conditions for the closing operation.

This has the effect that the closing operation can be executed without the variable members interfering with each other according to the operating conditions.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, a pointer means whose value is updated according to the passage of time, and a regulation in which the operation content of the variable means is defined for each variable member group in association with the value of the pointer means. A gaming machine characterized in that a defined information storage means for storing information and the variable control means are controlled so as to change the corresponding variable member group based on the defined information corresponding to the pointer means. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the value of the pointer means is updated according to the passage of time, and the specified information in which the operation content of the variable means is defined for each variable member group in association with the value of the pointer means is stored by the specified information storage means. It is controlled by the variable control means so as to change the corresponding variable member group based on the specified information corresponding to the pointer means.

As a result, the operation of the variable means can be set by a simple control of setting the operation according to the content of the specified information specified by the value of the pointer means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load required for controlling the variable control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machines G3 and G4, the information discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the specified information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information, and the information discriminating means correspond to the pointer means during execution of the closing operation. The gaming machine G5 is provided with an operation ending means for terminating the closing operation when it is determined that the specified information is the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G3 and G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the specified information corresponding to the pointer means is predetermined information is determined by the information discriminating means, and the specified information corresponding to the pointer means is the predetermined information during the execution of the input operation by the information discriminating means. When it is determined, the closing operation is terminated by the operation termination means.

This has the effect that the closing operation can be more easily completed without determining the elapsed time from the start of the closing operation, the operating status of the variable means, and the like.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, a discriminating means for determining whether or not the closing operation has been normally executed, and a notification operation when it is determined by the discriminating means that the closing operation could not be normally executed. A gaming machine G6 comprising a notification means to be executed.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the closing operation can be normally executed is determined by the discriminating means, and when it is determined by the discriminating means that the closing operation cannot be normally executed, the notification operation is executed by the notification means.

As a result, when an abnormality has occurred in the variable means, the clerk in the hall can be made aware of the occurrence of the abnormality at the time of the closing operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the abnormality can be quickly resolved based on the notification operation.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that it becomes difficult to appropriately set the operation of the variable member due to the diversification of the variable member.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a variable member, a variable means for changing the variable member, and a predetermined operation of the variable member based on the power-on. A closing control means that controls the variable means so as to perform an operation, and a determining means for determining whether or not the variable member is located within an operation starting range that is a predetermined operating range for starting the closing operation. When the determination means determines that the variable member is not located within the operation start range when the power is turned on, the variable means is returned to operate so as to be located within the operation start range. It is provided with a return operation execution means for executing the operation.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 determines that the variable member is not located within the operation start range in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the determination result by the determination means. The return operation is terminated when the position is changed from the position to be determined to the position determined to be within the operation start range.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the variable means places the variable member between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Is a predetermined operating range between the first position and the second position, and is within a specific operating range including at least the first position. A specific range determining means for determining whether or not the variable member is located is provided, and the operation start range is an operation range included in the specific operation range, and the second position of the specific operation range. The return operation executing means includes the end on the side, and when the specific range determination means determines that the variable member is located within the specific operation range, the variable member performs the return operation. To the second position side, and when it is determined by the specific range determining means that the variable member is not located within the specific operating range, the variable member is moved to the first position as the return operation. It operates to the position side.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the variable member is variable by the variable means. The variable means is controlled by the turn-on control means so that the variable member performs a turn-on operation which is a predetermined operation based on the power-on. Whether or not the variable member is located within the operation start range, which is a predetermined operation range for starting the closing operation, is determined by the determination means. When the determination means determines that the variable member is not within the operation start range when the power is turned on, the return operation execution means operates the variable means so that the variable member is located within the operation start range. Will be executed.
As a result, the variable means is operated within the operation start range by the return operation based on the power-on, so that the power-on operation can be preferably performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the accessory can be preferably set.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the return operation is performed when the variable member is changed from a position determined to be not within the operation start range to a position determined to be located within the operation start range based on the determination result by the determination means. The return operation is terminated by the execution means.
As a result, if the variable member is not located within the operation start range when the power is turned on, the return operation can be ended when the variable member operates at the position closest to the operation start range. Therefore, there is an effect that the return operation can be completed in a shorter time.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the variable member is bidirectionally variable between the first position and a second position different from the first position by the variable means. Whether or not the variable member is located within a specific operating range including at least the first position within a predetermined operating range between the first position and the second position is determined by the specific range determining means. NS. The operation start range is included in the specific operation range, and the end on the second position side of the specific operation range is included in the operation start range. When the variable member is determined to be located within the specific operation range by the specific range determining means, the variable member is operated to the second position side by the return operation executing means as the return operation. Further, when the variable member is located within the specific operation range and is determined to be within the specific operation range by the specific range determining means, the variable member is operated to the first position by the return operation executing means as the return operation.
As a result, it is possible to know whether the operation start range is on the first position side or the second position side based on the determination result by the specific range determination means. Therefore, in the return operation, the direction is opposite to the operation start range. There is an effect that the variable member can be operated efficiently without operating the variable member.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
115 power supply (power supply means)
222 ROM (storage means)
222c load reference value table (storage means)
223 RAM (drive power storage means)
223e Load value storage area (drive power storage means)
229 Motor for accessories (variable means)
230 LCD backlight (light emitting means)
410 Standing object (part of moving member)
510 tilting accessory (part of moving member)
520 rotating accessory (part of moving member)
710 Left swing accessory (part of moving member)
720 Central rocking accessory (part of moving member)
730 Right swinging accessory (part of moving member)
810 Right side slide accessory (part of moving member)
820 Left slide accessory (part of moving member)
830 Upper slide accessory (part of moving member)
840 Lower slide accessory (part of moving member)
S1121 Luminance variable means
S1408 calculation means
S1409 Power discrimination means
S1412 Drive suppression means
S1421 Operation control means
S1501 Discriminating means

Claims (2)

A light emitting means composed of at least a first light emitting means capable of emitting light and a second light emitting means capable of emitting light and different from the first light emitting means.
A luminance variable means that can at least change the luminance of the first luminous means to a first luminance and a second luminance darker than the first luminance.
Multiple movable members and
It is provided with an operation control means for controlling the plurality of operation members to perform an on-off operation, which is a predetermined operation, based on the power-on.
The brightness varying means, if it is controlled to perform the closing operation by the operation control means, all SANYO varying the brightness of the first light emitting means to said second luminance,
During execution of the previous SL-on operation, the gaming machine characterized in that the luminance of the second light emitting means is a least bright predetermined luminance configuration than the second luminance. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine can be played using a predetermined gaming medium.

Images